Tnc 640 heidenhain руководство

background image

TNC 640

Руководство пользователя

«Диалог открытым текстом

HEIDENHAIN»

Программное обеспечение с ЧПУ
340590-05
340591-05
340595-05

Русский (ru)
5/2015

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. HEIDENHAIN Manuals
  4. Control Panel
  5. TNC 640
  6. User manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

TNC 640

User’s Manual

Conversational Programming

NC Software

340590-08

340591-08

340595-08

English (en)

10/2017

loading

Related Manuals for HEIDENHAIN TNC 640

Summary of Contents for HEIDENHAIN TNC 640

  • Page 1
    TNC 640 User’s Manual Conversational Programming NC Software 340590-08 340591-08 340595-08 English (en) 10/2017…
  • Page 2
    Controls and displays Programming modes Controls and displays Function Keys Programming If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Test run Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen», page 131 Entering and editing coordinate…
  • Page 3
    Navigate up one page Potentiometer for feed rate Navigate down one page and spindle speed Feed rate Spindle speed Select the next tab in forms Up/down one dialog box or button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 5
    Fundamentals…
  • Page 6: About This Manual

    Signal word indicating the hazard severity Type and source of hazard Consequences of ignoring the hazard, e.g.: «There is danger of collision during subsequent machining operations» Escape – Hazard prevention measures HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 7
    Would you like any changes, or have you found any errors? We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you. Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 8
    All of the cycle functions (touch probe cycles and fixed cycles) are described in the Cycle Programming User’s Manual. If you need this user’s manual, please contact HEIDENHAIN if required. ID: 892905-xx HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 9
    Fundamentals | Control model, software and features Software options The TNC 640 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions: Additional Axis (options 0 to 7)
  • Page 10
    Extended Tool Management (option 93) Extended tool management Python-based Advanced Spindle Interpolation (option 96) Interpolating spindle Interpolation turning: Cycle 291: Interpolation turning, coupling Cycle 292: Interpolation turning, contour finishing HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 11
    Active Vibration Damping – AVD (option 46) Active vibration damping Damping of machine oscillations to improve the workpiece surface Batch Process Manager (option 154) Batch process manager Planning of production orders HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 12
    Legal information This product uses open source software. Further information is available on the control under: Programming operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 13
    New function for rounding corners, see «Rounding corners: M197», page 500 External access to the control can now be blocked with an MOD function, see «External access», page 848 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 14
    With the manual Basic Rotation touch probe cycle, workpiece misalignment can now be compensated for via a table rotation, see «Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table», page 767 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 15
    DEPTH REFERENCE has been introduced in order to evaluate the T ANGLE, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual Probing Cycle 4 MEASURING IN 3-D has been introduced, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 16
    Cycle Programming User’s Manual In Cycle 205 Universal Pecking you can now use parameter Q208 to define a feed rate for retraction, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 17
    Transfer from CAD Files», page 333 New software option 96 Advanced Spindle Interpolation, see «Software options», page 9 New software option 131 Spindle Synchronism, see «Software options», page 9 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 18
    Machine parameter maxLineGeoSearch (no. 105408) has been increased to max. 100000, see «Machine-specific user parameters», page 882 The names of software options number 8, 9 and 21 have changed, see «Software options», page 9 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 19
    ENH.REC.TURNING, AX. have been expanded by plunge feed rate Q488 Eccentric turning with Cycle 800 ADJUST XZ SYSTEM is possible with option 50 Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 20
    New software option 136 Visual Setup Control (camera-based monitoring of the setup situation), see «Software options», page 9,see «Camera-based monitoring of the setup situation VSC (option 136)», page 789. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 21
    999.9999, see «Managing presets», page 739 Tilting is permitted in combination with mirroring, see «The PLANE function: Tilting the working plane (option 8)», page 587 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 22
    Cycle 205 performs deburring on the coordinate surface With SL cycles, M110 is now taken into account with circles compensated inwards if it is active during machining Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 23
    SWITCH soft key, see «Editing an NC program», page 169 File management displays vertical scrollbars and supports scrolling with the mouse, see «Calling the file manager», page 180 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 24
    «Retraction after a power interruption», page 830 In the RETRACT operating mode, feed-rate limitation can be deactivated with the CANCEL THE FEED RATE LIMITATION soft key, see «Retraction after a power interruption», page 830 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 25
    With functions NC/PLC Backup and NC/PLC Restore you can save and restore single directories or the complete TNC drive, see «Backup and restore», page 119 Touchscreens operation is supported, see «Operating the Touchscreen», page 131 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 26
    M124 no longer triggers an error message but only a warning. This enables NC programs with programmed M124 to run through without interruption Upper and lower cases for a file name can be modified in the file management HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 27
    «Entering the program at any point: Mid-program startup», page 833 Mid-program startup operation and dialog guidance has been improved, also for pallet tables, see «Entering the program at any point: Mid-program startup», page 833 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 28
    Cycle 251 has been expanded by parameter Q439. The finishing strategy was also revised The finishing strategy was revised with cycle 252 Cycle 275 has been expanded with parameters Q369 and Q439 Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 29
    The machine tool builder can define update rules that make it possible, for example, to automatically remove umlauts from tables and NC programs when importing a table, see «Importing tool tables», page 252 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 30
    The FN18 functions have been expanded, see «FN 18: SYSREAD – Reading system data», page 402 New machine parameter iconPrioList (no. 100813) for defining the order of icons in the status display, see «Machine-specific user parameters», page 882 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 31
    «Machine-specific user parameters», page 882 The control now supports up to 24 control loops, including a maximum of four spindles. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 32
    To connect a USB stick you no longer have to press a soft key, see «Connecting and removing USB storage devices», page 190 The speed of setting the jog increment, spindle speed and feed rate was adjusted for electronic handwheels. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 33
    In the machine parameter decimalCharakter (no. 100805) you can define whether a period or a comma will be used as the decimal separator, see «Machine-specific user parameters», page 882 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 34
    New SERIAL column in the touch probe table Enhancement of the contour train: Cycle 25 with Residual Material Machining, Cycle 276 Three-D Contour Train Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 35
    16 Turning……………………….673 17 Manual Operation and Setup………………….713 18 Positioning with Manual Data Input………………797 19 Test Run and Program Run………………….803 20 MOD Functions……………………..843 21 Tables and Overviews……………………881 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 36
    Contents HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 37: Table Of Contents

    Presetting with a 3-D touch probe………………….88 Running the first program……………………89 Selecting the correct operating mode………………..89 Choosing the program you want to run………………..89 Starting the program……………………..89 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 38
    Configuring the connection – VNC…………………. 125 Shutting down or rebooting an external computer…………….126 Starting and stopping the connection………………..127 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probes and electronic handwheels……..128 3-D touch probes……………………..128 HR electronic handwheels……………………129 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 39
    Navigating in the table and NC programs………………. 134 Operating the simulation……………………135 Using the HEROS menu……………………136 Operating the CAD viewer……………………137 Functions in the taskbar……………………142 Touchscreen Calibration……………………142 Touchscreen Configuration……………………142 Touchscreen Cleaning…………………….. 143 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 40
    Renaming a file………………………. 189 Sorting files……………………….189 Additional functions……………………..190 Additional tools for management of external file types……………191 Additional tools for ITCs……………………199 Data transfer to or from an external data carrier……………..201 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 41
    Contents The control in a network……………………203 USB devices on the control…………………….204 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 42
    Opening the error window……………………224 Closing the error window……………………224 Detailed error messages……………………225 INTERNAL INFO soft key……………………225 FILTER soft key………………………. 225 Clearing errors……………………….226 Error log…………………………226 Keystroke log……………………….227 Informational texts……………………..228 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 43
    Contents Saving service files……………………..228 Calling the TNCguide help system…………………. 228 TNCguide context-sensitive help system………………229 Application……………………….229 Working with TNCguide……………………230 Downloading current help files………………….234 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 44
    Tool length compensation……………………266 Tool radius compensation……………………267 Tool management (option number 93)………………..270 Basics…………………………270 Calling tool management……………………271 Editing tool management……………………272 Available tool types……………………..276 Importing and exporting tool data………………….. 278 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 45
    Path contours – Polar coordinates………………..310 Overview………………………… 310 Datum for polar coordinates: pole CC………………..311 Straight line LP………………………..311 Circular path CP around pole CC………………….312 Circle CTP with tangential connection………………..312 Helix…………………………313 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 46
    Free straight line programming………………….321 Free circular path programming………………….322 Input possibilities……………………..323 Auxiliary points……………………….. 326 Relative data……………………….327 Example: FK programming 1………………….. 329 Example: FK programming 2………………….. 330 Example: FK programming 3………………….. 331 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 47
    Using the CAD viewer……………………. 336 Opening the CAD file………………………336 Basic settings……………………….337 Setting layers……………………….339 Setting a preset……………………….340 Defining the datum……………………..342 Selecting and saving a contour………………….345 Selecting and saving machining positions………………. 349 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 48
    Repeating program section repeats…………………368 Repeating a subprogram……………………369 Programming examples……………………370 Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds………………370 Example: Groups of holes……………………371 Example: Group of holes with several tools………………372 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 49
    FN 38: SEND – Send information from NC program…………….435 10.9 Accessing tables with SQL commands………………. 436 Introduction……………………….436 Overview of functions……………………..437 Programming SQL commands………………….438 Application example……………………..439 SQL BIND………………………..440 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 50
    Measurement results from touch probe cycles……………… 470 Checking the setup situation: Q601…………………471 10.13 Programming examples……………………472 Example: Ellipse……………………… 472 Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter…………..474 Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill…………….476 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 51
    Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140…………..495 Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141………………497 Deleting basic rotation: M143………………….498 Automatically retracting the tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148……….. 499 Rounding corners: M197……………………500 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 52
    Recording a teach-in cut……………………541 Activating and deactivating AFC………………….546 Log file…………………………548 Tool wear monitoring……………………… 549 Tool load monitoring……………………..549 12.6 Active Chatter Control ACC (option 145)………………550 Application……………………….550 Activating/deactivating ACC……………………551 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 53
    FN 28: TABREAD – Read from a freely definable table…………..575 Customizing the table format………………….575 12.13 Pulsing spindle speed FUNCTION S-PULSE………………576 Programming a pulsing spindle speed………………..576 Resetting the pulsing spindle speed………………..577 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 54
    12.15 Dwell time FUNCTION DWELL………………….580 Programming dwell time……………………580 12.16 Lift off tool at NC stop: FUNCTION LIFTOFF……………… 581 Programming tool lift-off with FUNCTION LIFTOFF…………….581 Resetting the lift-off function………………….. 583 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 55
    Selection of tool reference point and center of rotation…………..629 Resetting FUNCTION TCPM……………………630 13.6 Three-dimensional tool compensation (option 9)…………….631 Introduction……………………….631 Suppressing error messages with positive tool oversize: M107…………632 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 56
    From 3-D model to NC program………………….643 Consider with post processor configuration………………644 Please note the following for CAM programming…………….646 Possibilities for intervention on the control………………648 ADP motion control……………………..649 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 57
    Processing pallet table……………………. 657 14.2 Pallet preset management…………………… 659 Fundamentals……………………….659 Using pallet presets……………………..659 14.3 Tool-oriented machining……………………660 Fundamentals……………………….660 Sequence of tool-oriented machining………………..662 Mid-program startup with block scan………………..663 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 58
    15.1 Batch Process Manager (option 154)………………..666 Fundamentals……………………….666 Application……………………….666 Opening the Batch Process Manager………………..669 Creating a job list……………………..669 Editing a job list……………………… 671 Executing the job list……………………… 672 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 59
    16.5 Turning program functions (option 50)……………….. 697 Recessing and undercutting…………………….697 Blank form update TURNDATA BLANK………………..703 Inclined turning………………………..704 Simultaneous turning……………………… 705 Using a facing slide……………………..707 Cutting force monitoring with the AFC function…………….. 711 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 60
    Recording measured values from the touch probe cycles…………..755 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles to a datum table……….756 Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table………757 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 61
    17.12 Camera-based monitoring of the setup situation VSC (option 136)……….789 Basics…………………………789 Overview………………………… 791 Produce live image……………………..792 Manage monitoring data……………………793 Configuration……………………….795 Results of the image evaluation………………….796 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 62
    Contents 18 Positioning with Manual Data Input………………797 18.1 Programming and executing simple machining operations…………798 Positioning with manual data input (MDI)………………. 799 Protecting programs in $MDI………………….802 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 63
    Returning to the contour……………………839 19.6 Automatic program start……………………840 Application……………………….840 19.7 Skipping blocks……………………..841 Application……………………….841 Delete / symbol………………………. 841 Delete / symbol………………………. 841 19.8 Optional program-run interruption………………..842 Application……………………….842 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 64
    Check parity (parity no. 106704)………………….859 Set stop bits (stopBits no. 106705)………………… 859 Set handshake (flowControl no. 106706)…………………860 File system for file operation (fileSystem no. 106707)……………. 860 Block check character (bccAvoidCtrlChar no. 106708)…………….. 860 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 65
    Application……………………….877 Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder…………..877 Setting the transmission channel………………….878 Selecting the transmitter power………………….878 Statistical data……………………….879 20.16 Load machine configuration………………….880 Application……………………….880 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 66
    Software options……………………..905 Accessories……………………….908 21.4 Overview tables……………………..909 Fixed cycles……………………….909 Miscellaneous functions……………………911 21.5 Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared…………..913 Comparison: Specifications……………………913 Comparison: Data interfaces……………………913 Comparison: PC software……………………914 Comparison: User functions…………………… 914 Comparison: Miscellaneous functions………………..
  • Page 67: First Steps With The Tnc 640

    First Steps with the TNC 640…

  • Page 68: Overview

    Read and follow the safety precautions and safety symbols Use the safety devices Refer to your machine manual. Switching on the machine and traversing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 69
    The control is now ready for operation in the Manual operation mode. Further information on this topic Approaching reference points Further information: «Switch-on», page 714 Operating modes Further information: «Programming», page 96 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 70: Programming The First Part

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Programming the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can write programs only in Programming mode: Press the operating mode key The control switches to the Programming mode of operation.

  • Page 71: Opening A New Program/File Management

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Opening a new program/file management Press the PGM MGT key The control opens the file manager. The file management of the control is arranged much like the file management on a PC with Windows Explorer.

  • Page 72: Defining A Workpiece Blank

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Defining a workpiece blank After you have created a new program you can define a workpiece blank. For example, define a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points, each with reference to the selected preset.

  • Page 73: Program Layout

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This makes it easier to find your place, accelerates programming and reduces errors. Recommended program layout for simple, conventional…

  • Page 74
    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs Example 0 BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM 1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X… Y… Z… 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X… Y… Z… 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF POS1( X…
  • Page 75: Programming A Simple Contour

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Programming a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm. You have already defined the workpiece blank. After you have initiated a dialog through a function key, enter all the data requested by the control in the screen header.

  • Page 76
    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Press the approach function soft key APPR CT: Enter the coordinates of the contour starting in X and Y, e.g. 5/5, confirm with the ENT point Center angle? Enter the approach angle, e.g.
  • Page 77
    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Retracting tool: Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. 250. Press the ENT key Confirm Tool radius comp: RL/RR/no comp?
  • Page 78: Creating A Cycle Program

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Creating a cycle program The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece blank.

  • Page 79
    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Run the drilling cycle on the defined pattern: Confirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX) Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and coolant, e.g. M13, and confirm with the END key The control stores the entered positioning block.
  • Page 80
    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Programming the first part Example 0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM 1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Workpiece blank definition 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S4500…
  • Page 81: Graphically Testing The First Part

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Graphically testing the first part Graphically testing the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can test programs in the Test Run operating mode: Press the operating mode key The control switches to the Test Run mode of operation.

  • Page 82: Choosing The Program You Want To Test

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Graphically testing the first part Choosing the program you want to test Press the PGM MGT key The control opens the file manager. Press the LAST FILES soft key The control opens a pop-up window with the most recently selected files.

  • Page 83: Starting The Test Run

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Graphically testing the first part Starting the test run Press the RESET + START soft key The control resets the previously active tool data The control simulates the active program up to a…

  • Page 84: Setting Up Tools

    When measuring on the machine: store the tools in the tool changer Further information: «The pocket table TOOL_P .TCH», page 86 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 85: The Tool Table Tool.t

    «Modes of operation», page 95 Working with the tool table Further information: «Entering tool data into the table», page 242 Using the tool management (option 93) Further information: «Calling tool management», page 271 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 86: The Pocket Table Tool_P .Tch

    Further information on this topic Operating modes of the control Further information: «Modes of operation», page 95 Working with the pocket table Further information: «Pocket table for tool changer», page 255 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 87: Workpiece Setup

    Presetting with a 3-D touch probe Further information: «Presetting with a 3-D touch probe «, page 772 Presetting without 3-D touch probe Further information: «Presetting without a 3-D touch probe», page 747 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 88: Presetting With A 3-D Touch Probe

    To set to 0: Press the SET PRESET soft key Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Presetting Further information: «Presetting with a 3-D touch probe «, page 772 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 89: Running The First Program

    First Steps with the TNC 640 | Running the first program Running the first program Selecting the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Program run, single block or the Program run, full sequence mode: Press the operating mode key…

  • Page 91: Introduction

    Introduction…

  • Page 92: The Tnc 640

    Compatibility Machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls (starting from the TNC 150 B) may not always run on the TNC 640. If the NC blocks contain invalid elements, the control will mark these as ERROR blocks or with error messages when the file is opened.

  • Page 93: Visual Display Unit And Operating Panel

    Soft-key selection keys for machine tool builders Keys for switching the soft keys for machine tool builders If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

  • Page 94: Control Panel

    Mouse buttons USB connection The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover. If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen», page 131 Refer to your machine manual.

  • Page 95: Modes Of Operation

    Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program Left: program, right: status display Left: program, right: collision object HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 96: Programming

    Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program Left: program, right: status display Left: program, right: graphics Graphic Left: program, right: collision object Collision object HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 97: Program Run, Full Sequence And Program Run, Single Block

    Soft keys for screen layout with pallet tables Soft key Window Pallet table Left: program, right: pallet table Left: pallet table, right: status display Left: pallet table, right: graphics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 98: Status Displays

    Axes are moving under a 3-D basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane Axes are mirrored and moved The M128 function or FUNCTION TCPM is active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 99
    The order of icons can be changed with the optional machine parameter iconPrioList (no. 100813). The control-in-operation symbol and the DCM icon (option 40) are always visible and cannot be configured. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 100: Additional Status Displays

    Tool information Active M functions Active coordinate transformations Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name and path of the active main program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 101
    Active subprograms with block number in which the subprogram was called and the label number that was called HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 102
    Positions and coordinates (POS tab) Soft key Meaning Type of position display, e.g. actual position Tilt angle of the working plane Angle of basic transformations Active kinematics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 103
    (TAB) and FUNCTION TURNDATA CORR (PGM) Tool life, maximum tool life (TIME 1) and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL (TIME 2) Display of programmed tool and replacement tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 104
    In the optional machine parameter CfgDisplayCoordSys (no. 127501) you can specify the coordinate system in which the status display shows an active datum shift. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 105
    Shift (mW-CS) Rotation (WPL-CS) Feed rate factor Further information: «Global Program Settings (option 44)», page 519 The values of the Handwheel superimp. setting are displayed on the POS HR tab. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 106
    Current deviation of the speed Current machining time Line diagram, in which the current spindle load and the value commanded by the control for the feed rate override are shown HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 107: Window Manager

    In this case, switch to the window manager and correct the problem. If required, refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 108: Overview Of Taskbar

    HEIDENHAIN symbol between the workspaces by pressing and holding the left mouse button. Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can get information, make settings or start applications. The following functions are available:…

  • Page 109
    «VNC», page 117 WindowManagerConfig: Available only to authorized specialists Firewall: Configure the firewall Further information: «Firewall», page 870 HePacketManager: Available only to authorized specialists HePacketManager Custom: Available only to authorized specialists HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 110
    The applications available under tools can be started directly by selecting the corresponding file type in the file management of the control Further information: «Additional tools for management of external file types», page 191 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 111: Portscan

    Select the Diagnostic menu item Select the Portscan menu item The control opens the HeRos Portscan pop-up window. Press the Automatic update on key Set the time interval with the slider HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 112: Remote Service

    With an NC software installation a temporary certificate is automatically installed on the control. An installation, also in the form of an update, may only be carried out by a service technician from the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 113
    Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu Select the Diagnostic menu item Select the RemoteService menu item Enter the Session key of the machine tool builder HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 114: Printer

    FN functions, e.g. during probing. Standard printer Select to define the standard printer in case several printers are available. Is defined automatically when creating the first printer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 115
    Using the FN 16: F-PRINT function Further information: «Printing messages», page 401 List of printable files: Text files Graphic files PDF files The connected printer must be PostScript-enabled. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 116: Selinux Security Software

    Starting the SELinux configuration: The configuration of SELinux is usually password-protected by your machine manufacturer; refer here to the relevant machine manual HEIDENHAIN recommends activating SELinux because it provides additional protection against attacks from outside. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 117: Vnc

    Manual Manually entered client Denied This client is not permitted to connect TeleService/IPC 61xx Client via TeleService connection DHCP Other computer that obtains an IP address from this computer HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 118
    This dialog makes it possible to refuse that the focus be given to the requesting client. If this does not occur, the focus changes to the requesting client after the set time limit. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 119: Backup And Restore

    Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu Select the Tools menu item Open the NC/PLC Backup or NC/PLC Restore menu item The control opens the pop-up window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 120
    Select the next step with the FORWARD soft key The control generates the backup file. Confirm with the OK soft key The control concludes the backup process and restarts the NC software. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 121
    Stop the control if required with the STOP NC SOFTWARE soft Extract the archive The control restores the files. Confirm with the OK soft key The control restarts the NC software. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 122: Remote Desktop Manager (Option 133)

    HEIDENHAIN assures a functioning connection between HEROS 5 and the IPC 6641. No guarantee is given for other combinations and connections. If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

  • Page 123: Configuring Connections — Windows Terminal Service (Remotefx)

    Select the desired operating system Win XP Win 7 Win 8.X Win 10 Another Windows Press OK The control opens the Edit the connection pop-up window. Edit the connection HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 124
    This prevents that two users access the control simultaneously. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 125: Configuring The Connection — Vnc

    Host name or IP address of the external computer. In the recom- Required mended configuration of the IPC 6641, the IP address 192.168.254.3 is used Password Password for connecting to the VNC server Required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 126: Shutting Down Or Rebooting An External Computer

    The control switches to the desktop of the connection. Single click with the right mouse button The control displays the connection menu. Move to the following Not active with this connection – workspace HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 127: Starting And Stopping The Connection

    Further information: «Shutting down or rebooting an external computer», page 126 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 128: Accessories: Heidenhain 3-D Touch Probes And Electronic Handwheels

    A wear-resistant optical switch generates the trigger signal. With the TT 160, signal transmission is by cable. The TT 460 supports infrared and radio transmission. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 129: Hr Electronic Handwheels

    Several electronic handwheels can also be connected simultaneously and used alternatively on controls with the (HSCI: HEIDENHAIN Serial Controller Interface) serial interface for control components. Configuration is performed via the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 131: Operating The Touchscreen

    Operating the Touchscreen…

  • Page 132: Display Unit And Operation

    Tap on the operating mode in the header modes Shift the soft-key row Swipe horizontally over the soft-key row Soft-key selection keys Tap on the function in the touchscreen HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 133: Gestures

    Continuous contact of fingertip on the screen Swipe Flowing motion over the screen Drag A combination of long-press and then swipe, moving a finger over the screen when the starting point is clear- ly defined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 134: Navigating In The Table And Nc Programs

    You can navigate in an NC program or a table as follows: Symbol Gesture Function Mark the NC block or table line Stop scrolling Double tap Activate the table line Swipe Scroll through the NC program or table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 135: Operating The Simulation

    Function Double tap Set the graphic to its original size Drag Rotate the graphic (only 3-D graphics) Two-finger drag Move graphics Spread Magnify the graphic Pinch Reduce the graphic HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 136: Using The Heros Menu

    Gesture Function Select the measuring point Using the HEROS menu You can use the HEROS menu as follows: Symbol Gesture Function Select the application Long press Open the application HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 137: Operating The Cad Viewer

    Activate Add and double-tap on Reset the graphic or 3-D model to its original size and the background angle Drag Rotate the graphic or 3-D model (only in the Layer Setting mode) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 138
    Select element Tap on an element in the list- Select or deselect an element view window Activate Add and tap on an Part, shorten, or lengthen and element element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 139
    Reset the graphic to its original size Swipe over an element Show a preview of selected elements Show element information Two-finger drag Move graphics Spread Magnify the graphic Pinch Reduce the graphic HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 140
    Show a preview of selected elements Show element information Activate Add and drag Spread a fast selection area Activate Remove and drag Spread an area for deselection of elements Two-finger drag Move graphics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 141
    The third desktop stays active in the background Switch as follows back to the Programming mode of operation: Press the DIADUR key Select work surface 2 in the taskbar HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 142: Functions In The Taskbar

    Disable Touchfingers to hide the touch points Enable Single Touchfinger to show the touch point Enable Full Touchfingers to show the touch points of all fingers involved Confirm with OK HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 143: Touchscreen Cleaning

    The control locks the screen for 90 seconds. Clean the screen If you would like to stop the cleaning mode: Pull the displayed sliders apart at the same time HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 145: Fundamentals, File Management

    Fundamentals, File Management…

  • Page 146: Fundamentals

    With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established directly after switch-on. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 147: Reference Systems

    Tool Coordinate System All reference systems build up on each other. They are subject to the kinematic chain of the specific machine tool. The machine coordinate system is the reference system. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 148
    Refer to the machine tool builder’s documentation Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets Check the display of the PAL tab before you start machining HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 149
    The ACTL. and NOML. displays show movements of the Y axis and Z axis in the input coordinate system. The user can program positions related to the machine datum, e.g. by using the miscellaneous function M91. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 150
    Refer to the machine tool builder’s documentation Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets Check the display of the PAL tab before you start machining HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 151
    3D ROT functions B-CS PLANE functions Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT (shifting before tilting the working plane) Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE (mirroring before tilting the working plane) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 152
    Other transformations are of course possible in the working plane coordinate system. Further information: «Working plane coordinate system WPL-CS», page 153 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 153
    Turning function (option 50). I-CS Transformations in the working plane coordinate system: Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 10 ROTATION Cycle 11 SCALING Cycle 26 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING PLANE RELATIVE HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 154
    3-axis machine tools or with pure 3-axis machining. The BASE TRANSFORM. values of the active line of the preset table have a direct effect on the input coordinate system with this assumption. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 155
    Orientation of the tool coordinate system can be performed in various reference systems. Further information: «Tool coordinate system T-CS», page 156 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 156
    7 L A+0 B+45 C+0 R0 F2500 7 LN X+48 Y+102 Z-1.5 NX-0.04658107 NY0.00045007 NZ0.8848844 TX-0.08076201 TY-0.34090025 TZ0.93600126 R0 M128 7 LN X+48 Y+102 Z-1.5 NX-0.04658107 NY0.00045007 NZ0.8848844 R0 M128 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 157
    + DR PROG PROG → toroid cutter or toroidal cutter Without the TCPM function or miscellaneous function M128, orientation of the tool coordinate system and input coordinate system is identical. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 158: Designation Of The Axes On Milling Machines

    The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA. Coordinates of the pole Reference axis of the angle (plane) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 159: Absolute And Incremental Workpiece Positions

    Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute coordinates always refer to the pole and the angle reference axis. Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 160: Selecting The Preset

    X=450 Y=750. By using the Datum shift cycle you can shift the datum temporarily to the position X=450, Y=750 and program the holes to 7) without further calculations. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 161: Creating And Writing Programs

    The control does not automatically check whether collisions can occur between the tool and the workpiece. There is danger of collision during the approach movement after a tool change! If necessary, program an additional safe auxiliary position HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 162: Defining The Blank: Blk Form

    1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 163
    If you define a rotationally symmetric blank with incremental coordinates, the dimensions are then independent of the diameter programming. The subprogram can be designated with a number, an alphanumeric name, or a QS parameter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 164: Creating A New Nc Program

    BLK FORM (workpiece blank). Select a rectangular workpiece blank: Press the soft key for a rectangular blank form Working plane in graphic: XY Enter the spindle axis, e.g. Z HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 165
    The control automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks. If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog at Working plane in graphic: XY using the DEL key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 166: Programming Tool Movements In Klartext

    MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M ? 3 (enter the miscellaneous function M3 Spindle on) With the END key, the control ends this dialog. Example 3 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 167
    The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT column. Functions for conversational guidance Ignore the dialog question End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 168: Actual Position Capture

    (e.g. for radius compensation), then the control closes the soft-key row for axis selection. The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the Tilt working plane function is active. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 169: Editing An Nc Program

    ENT key. Or: Press the GOTO key, enter the block number step and jump up or down the number of entered lines by pressing the N LINES soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 170
    Confirm with the OK soft key or the ENT key, or press the CANCEL soft key to abort The file saved with SAVE AS can also be found in the file management by pressing the LAST FILES soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 171
    If you start a search in a very long NC program, the control shows a progress indicator. You can cancel the search at any time, if necessary. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 172
    Using the arrow keys, select the block after which you wish to insert the copied (cut) program section Insert the saved program section: Press the INSERT BLOCK soft To end the marking function, press the CANCEL SELECTION soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 173: The Control’s Search Function

    Repeat the search process The control moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for. Terminate the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 174
    To replace all text occurrences, press the REPLACE ALL soft key. To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key Terminate the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 175: File Management: Basics

    2 GB in size. Depending on the setting, the control generates backup files with the extension *.bak after editing and saving of NC programs. This reduces the available memory space. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 176
    The maximum permitted path length is 255 characters. The path length consists of the drive characters, the directory name and the file name, including the extension. Further information: «Paths», page 178 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 177: Displaying Externally Generated Files On The Control

    Depending on operating conditions (e.g. vibration load), hard disks generally have a higher failure rate after three to five years of service. HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends having the hard disk inspected after three to five years. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 178: Working With The File Manager

    PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the following path: TNC:AUFTR1NCPROGPROG1.H The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 179: Overview: Functions Of The File Manager

    Customize table view Manage network drives Select the editor Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Refresh directory Rename a directory Create a new directory HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 180: Calling The File Manager

    Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited To display the dependent files, set the machine parameter dependentFiles (no. 122101) to MANUAL. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 181: Selecting Drives, Directories And Files

    Step 1: Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window To select a drive, press the SELECT soft key, or Press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 182
    If you enter the first letter of the file you are looking for in file management, the cursor automatically jumps to the first program with the same letter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 183: Creating A New Directory

    The original file is retained. When you start the copying process with the ENT key or the OK soft key, the control displays a pop-up window with a progress indicator. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 184: Copying Files Into Another Directory

    To leave the files as they are, press the CANCEL soft key If you want to overwrite a protected file, select the Protected files field or cancel the process. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 185: Copying A Table

    Press the TAG soft key Select additional lines, if required Press the SAVE AS soft key Enter a name for the table in which the selected lines are to be saved HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 186: Copying A Directory

    The control asks whether you want to delete the file. To confirm the deletion, press the OK soft key; or To cancel deletion, press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 187: Deleting A Directory

    The control asks you whether you really want to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files. To confirm the deletion, press the OK soft key; or To cancel deletion, press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 188: Tagging Files

    To copy tagged files: Leave the active soft-key row Press the COPY soft key To delete tagged files: Leave the active soft-key row Press the DELETE soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 189: Renaming A File

    Press the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion SORT BY NAME SORT BY SIZE SORT BY DATE SORT BY TYPE SORT BY STATUS UNSORTED HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 190: Additional Functions

    To remove a USB device, proceed as follows: Move the cursor to the left-hand window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Remove the USB device Further information: «USB devices on the control», page 204 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 191: Additional Tools For Management Of External File Types

    Adjust the setting in the TNCremo data transfer software, if required (menu item >Extras > Configuration > Mode). If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

  • Page 192
    Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the File pull-down menu. PDF viewer Move the cursor to the Close menu item. Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 193
    Press the key for switching the soft keys additional tool opens the File pull- Gnumeric down menu. Move the cursor to the Close menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 194
    If you position the mouse pointer over a button, a brief tool tip explaining the function of this button will be displayed. More information on how to use is available in Help. Browser HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 195
    Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. Do not change the Web Browser version. Otherwise, the security settings of SELinux will block the execution of Web Browser. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 196
    Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the ARCHIVE pull-down menu. Xarchiver Move the cursor to the Exit menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 197
    Select the Tools and Leafpad menu items in the pull-down menu Proceed as follows to exit Leafpad: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select Exit The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 198
    Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the File pull-down menu. ristretto Move the cursor to the Exit menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 199: Additional Tools For Itcs

    Using the additional ITC Gestures tool, the machine manufacturer configures the gesture control on the touch screen. Refer to your machine manual. This function may only be used with the permission of your machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 200
    Start the tool in control using the task bar The ITC opens a pop-up window with three options Select Touch Sensitivity Press the OK button The ITC closes the pop-up window HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 201: Data Transfer To Or From An External Data Carrier

    Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the file you wish to transfer: Moves the cursor up and down within a window Moves the cursor from the right to the left window, and vice versa HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 202
    A status window appears on the control, informing about the copying progress, or Stop transfer: Press the WINDOW soft key The control displays the standard file manager window again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 203
    Auto column if the connec- tion is established automatically Set up new network connection Remove Delete existing network connection Copy Copy network connection Edit Edit network connection Clear Delete the status window HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 204
    The dialog is closed with the HIDE soft key and file transfer is continued in the background. The control displays a warning until file transfer is completed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 205
    Fundamentals, File Management | Working with the file manager Removing USB devices To remove a USB device, proceed as follows: Move the cursor to the left-hand window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Remove the USB device HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 207: Programming Aids

    Programming Aids…

  • Page 208: Adding Comments

    Press the INSERT COMMENT soft key Alternative: Press the < key on the alphabetic keyboard The control inserts a semicolon ; at the beginning of the block. Press the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 209: Functions For Editing Of The Comment

    Jump to the beginning of a word. Use a space to separate words Jump to the end of a word. Use a space to separate words Switch between paste and overwrite mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 210: Freely Editing An Nc Program

    The control opens a new NC block. Add the desired syntax Confirm your entry with END After confirmation, the control checks the syntax. Errors will result in ERROR blocks. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 211: Display Of Nc Programs

    Screen content can be shifted with the mouse using the scroll bar at the right edge of the program window. In addition, the size and position of the scrollbar indicates program length and cursor position. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 212: Structuring Programs

    Displaying the program structure window / Changing the active window Display structure window: For this screen layout press the PROGRAM + STRUCTURE soft key Change the active window: Press the CHANGE WINDOW soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 213: Inserting A Structure Block In The Program Window

    If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block, the control at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can quickly skip large program sections. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 214: Calculator

    Add value to buffer memory Save the value to buffer memory Recall from buffer memory Delete buffer memory contents Natural logarithm Logarithm Exponential function Check the algebraic sign Form the absolute value HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 215
    The calculator remains in effect even after a change in operating modes. Press the END soft key to close the calculator. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 216
    Open the cutting data calculator You can also shift the calculator with the arrow keys on your keyboard. If you have connected a mouse you can also position the calculator with this. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 217: Cutting Data Calculator

    Window for spindle speed calculation: Code letter Meaning Tool radius (mm) Cutting speed (m/min) Result for spindle speed (rev/min) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 218
    Load the feed per tooth from the open dialog field into the cutting data calculator form Load the value from an open dialog field into the cutting data calculator form Switch to the pocket calculator HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 219
    Programming Aids | Cutting data calculator Soft key Function Move the cutting data calculator in the direction of the arrow Use inch values in the cutting data calculator Close the cutting data calculator HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 220: Programming Graphics

    RND light blue: holes and threads ocher: tool midpoint path red: rapid traverse Further information: «FK programming graphics», page 319 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 221: Generating A Graphic For An Existing Program

    Selecting views Plan view Front view Page view Display or hide tool paths Display or hide tool paths in rapid traverse HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 222: Block Number Display On/Off

    Shift the soft-key row Erase the graphics: Press the CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key Showing grid lines Shift the soft-key row Show grid lines: Press the Show grid lines soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 223: Magnification Or Reduction Of Details

    After you release the left mouse button, the control zooms in on the defined area. To rapidly magnify or reduce any area, rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 224: Error Messages

    The control opens the error window and displays all accumulated error messages. Closing the error window Press the END soft key; or Press the ERR key The control closes the error window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 225: Detailed Error Messages

    Open the error window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FILTER soft key The control filters the identical warnings Leave Filter: Press the GO BACK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 226: Clearing Errors

    Set the current error log if required: Press the CURRENT FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file, and the most recent entry is at the end. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 227: Keystroke Log

    Soft key/Keys Function Go to beginning of keystroke log Go to end of keystroke log Find text Current keystroke log Previous keystroke log Up/down one line Return to main menu HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 228: Informational Texts

    There you will find further, more detailed information on the error message concerned. Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages Call the help for HEIDENHAIN machine-specific error messages, if available HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 229: Tncguide Context-Sensitive Help System

    .chm files. As an option, your machine tool builder can embed machine-specific documentation in the TNCguide. These documents then appear as a separate book in the main.chm file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 230: Working With Tncguide

    Press the HELP key. The control opens the Help system and shows the description of the active function. This does not apply for miscellaneous functions or cycles from your machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 231
    Select the page last shown Page forward if you have used the Select page last shown function Move up by one page Move down by one page HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 232
    The control synchronizes the subject index and creates a list in which you can find the subject more easily. Use the ENT key to call the information on the selected keyword HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 233
    If you activate the Search only in titles function, the control searches only through headings and ignores the body text. To activate the function, use the mouse or select it and then press the space bar to confirm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 234: Downloading Current Help Files

    When using TNCremo to transfer the .chm files to the control, select the binary mode for files with the .chm extension. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 235
    Danish TNC:tncguidefi Finnish TNC:tncguidenl Dutch TNC:tncguidepl Polish TNC:tncguidehu Hungarian TNC:tncguideru Russian TNC:tncguidezh Chinese (simplified) TNC:tncguidezh-tw Chinese (traditional) TNC:tncguidesl Slovenian TNC:tncguideno Norwegian TNC:tncguidesk Slovak TNC:tncguidekr Korean TNC:tncguidetr Turkish TNC:tncguidero Romanian HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 237: Tools

    Tools…

  • Page 238: Entering Tool-Related Data

    You can adjust the feed rate during the program run with the feed rate potentiometer F . The feed rate potentiometer lowers the programmed feed rate, not the feed rate calculated by the control. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 239: Spindle Speed S

    Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed potentiometer S. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 240: Tool Data

    The entire tool length is essential for the control in order to perform numerous functions involving multi-axis machining. Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 241: Delta Values For Lengths And Radii

    In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key. Example 4 TOOL DEF 5 L+10 R+5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 242: Entering Tool Data Into The Table

    You can select the table view with the Screen Layout key. You can choose between a list view and a form view. Other settings, such as HIDE/ SORT/ COLUMNS, can be made after the file is open. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 243
    The Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) function also uses the length and radius data for displaying the active tool and for collision monitoring. Incomplete or incorrect tool definitions may lead to premature or false collision warnings. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 244
    Current age of the tool in minutes: The control automati- cally counts the current tool life (CUR_TIME: For CURrent TIME) A starting value can be entered for used tools HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 245
    The control immediately uses the value given for regula- tion, meaning a teach-in cut is dropped. The value should be previously determined with a teach-in cut. Further information: «Recording a teach-in cut», page 541 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 246
    Tool life expired Time for exceeding the tool life in minutes Further information: «Overtime for tool life», page 262 Function is defined by the machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 247
    If the entered value is exceeded, the control locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool measurement, Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 248
    Select the table start Select the table end Select the previous page in the table Select the next page in the table Find the text or number Go to beginning of line HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 249
    Delete the current line (tool) Sort the tools according to the content of a column Select possible entries from a pop-up window Reset the value Place the cursor in the current cell HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 250
    Show all drills in the tool table Show all cutters in the tool table Show all taps/thread cutters in the tool table Show all touch probes in the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 251
    The control provides special tool management for turning tools to support this definition process. Further information: «Tool data», page 688 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 252: Importing Tool Tables

    If you export a tool table from an iTNC 530 and import it into a TNC 640, you have to adapt its format and content before you can use the tool table. On the TNC 640, you can adapt the tool table conveniently with the ADAPT NC PGM / TABLE function. The control converts the contents of the imported tool table to a format valid for the TNC 640 and saves the changes to the selected file.

  • Page 253
    When iTNC 530 tool tables are imported, all defined tool types are transferred as well. Tool types not present are imported as type Undefined. Check the tool table after the import. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 254: Overwriting Tool Data From An External Pc

    (e.g. TST.T) is overwritten. All other tool data of the table TOOL.T remains unchanged. The procedure for copying tool tables using the file manager is described in the file management. Further information: «Copying a table», page 185 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 255: Pocket Table For Tool Changer

    Press the POCKET TABLE soft key Set the EDIT soft key to ON. On your machine this might not be necessary or even possible. Refer to your machine manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 256
    Box magazine: Lock the pocket below below? LOCKED_LEFT Lock the pocket at Box magazine: Lock the pocket at left left? LOCKED_RIGHT Lock the pocket at Box magazine: Lock the pocket at right right? HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 257
    Place the cursor in the current cell Sort the view Refer to your machine manual. The machine manufacturer defines the features, properties and designations of the various display filters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 258: Calling The Tool Data

    If the tool axis is also entered in the TOOL CALL block, the control will insert a replacement tool if a replacement tool was defined. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 259
    If you are working with tool tables, use a TOOL DEF block to preselect the next tool. Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or type the tool name in quotation marks. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 260: Tool Change

    Directly before a departure function DEP Directly before and after CHF and RND During execution of macros During execution of a tool change Directly after a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF During execution of SL cycles HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 261
    If you want to reset the current age of a tool (e.g. after changing the indexable inserts), enter the value 0 in the CUR_TIME column. The M101 function is not available for turning tools and in turning mode. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 262
    With deviations, the control displays an error message and does not replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the M function M107, and reactivate it with M108. Further information: «Three-dimensional tool compensation (option 9)», page 631 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 263: Tool Usage Test

    Completely run the NC program in the Program Run, Full Sequence/Single Block operating modes In the Test Run operating mode, press the GENERATE TOOL USAGE FILE soft key (also possible without simulation) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 264
    Minimum feed rate override that occurred during machining. The control enters the value -1 during the test run NAMEPROG 0: The tool number is programmed 1: The tool name is programmed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 265
    Press the OK soft key The control closes the pop-up window. Alternative: Press the ENT key You can query the tool usage test with the FN 18 ID975 NR1 function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 266: Tool Compensation

    Tool length L from TOOL DEF block or tool table Oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block TOOL CALL Oversize for length DL in the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 267: Tool Radius Compensation

    Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation: R0 The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path, or to the programmed coordinates. Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 268
    Select tool movement to the right of the contour: Press the RR soft key, or Select tool movement without radius compensation or cancel radius compensation: Press the ENT key Terminate the block: Press the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 269
    Incorrect positions can lead to contour damage. Danger of collision during machining! Program safe approach and departure positions at a sufficient distance from the contour Consider the tool radius Consider the approach strategy HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 270: Tool Management (Option Number 93)

    If you edit a tool in tool management, the selected tool is locked. If this tool is required in the NC program being used, the control shows the message: Tool table locked. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 271: Calling Tool Management

    «Tool usage test», page 263 If a pallet table is selected in the Program Run operating mode, the Tooling list and T usage order are calculated for the entire pallet table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 272: Editing Tool Management

    SHIFT COLUMN active: The column can be moved by drag and drop Reset the manually changed settings (move columns) to the original condition HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 273
    EDIT ON/OFF soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 274
    Calculate the measured values of tool compensation (only active for turning tools) Add tool index Delete tool index Copy the tool data of the selected tool Insert the copied tool data in the selected tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 275
    Regularly back up important data to external drives The tool data of tools still stored in the pocket table cannot be deleted. The tools must be removed from the magazine first. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 276: Available Tool Types

    Piloted counterbore(TSINK),TSINK Boring tool,BOR Back boring tool,BCKBOR Thread mill,GF Thread mill w/ countersink,GSF Thread mill w/ single thread,EP Thread mill w/ indxbl insert,WSP Thread milling drill,BGF Circular thread mill,ZBGF HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 277
    Tools | Tool management (option number 93) Icon Tool type Tool type number Roughing cutter (MILL_R),MILL_R Finishing cutter (MILL_F),MILL_F Rough/finish cutter,MILL_RF Floor finisher(MILL_FD),MILL_FD Side finisher (MILL_FS),MILL_FS Face milling cutter,MILL_FACE HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 278: Importing And Exporting Tool Data

    Use the arrow keys or mouse to select the file to be imported and confirm with the ENT key The control shows a pop-up window with the content of the CSV file Start the import procedure with the EXECUTE soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 279
    Example T,L,R,DL,DR Line 1 with column names 4,125.995,7.995,0,0 Line 2 with tool data 9,25.06,12.01,0,0 Line 3 with tool data 28,196.981,35,0,0 Line 4 with tool data HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 280
    The control shows a pop-up window with the status of the export process Terminate the export process by pressing the END key or soft By default the control stores the exported CSV file in the TNC:systemtooltab directory. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 281: Programming Contours

    Programming Contours…

  • Page 282: Tool Movements

    With the control’s miscellaneous functions you can affect the program run, e.g., a program interruption the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off the path behavior of the tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 283: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

    In addition, programming with Q parameters enables you to measure with the 3-D touch probe during the program run. Further information: «Programming Q Parameters», page 375 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 284: Fundamentals Of Path Functions

    If the NC block contains two coordinates, the control moves the tool in the programmed plane. Example L X+70 Y+50 The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves on the XY plane to the position X=70, Y=50. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 285
    When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element, enter the direction of rotation as follows: Clockwise direction of rotation: DR- Counterclockwise direction of rotation: DR+ HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 286
    Creating the NC blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the dialog. The control asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the NC block into the part program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 287
    Press the F AUTO soft key. CALL MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M? Enter 3 (miscellaneous function e.g. M3) and terminate the dialog with the END key Example L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX M3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 288: Approaching And Departing A Contour

    If danger of collision exists, approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately. Example 30 L Z-10 R0 FMAX 31 L X+20 Y+30 RL F350 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 289
    Example in the figure on the right: If you set the end point in the dark gray area, the contour will be damaged when the contour is approached/departed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 290: Overview: Types Of Paths For Contour Approach And Departure

    The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour. You program helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 291: Important Positions For Approach And Departure

    There is danger of collision during the approach movement! Program a suitable pre-position Check the auxiliary point P , the sequence and the contour with the aid of the graphic simulation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 292
    If you program APPR LN or APPR CT with R0, the control stops the machining/simulation with an error message. This method of function differs from the iTNC 530 control! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 293: Approaching On A Straight Line With Tangential Connection: Appr Lt

    8 APPR LN X+10 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 294: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Appr Ct

    8 APPR CT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 CCA180 R+10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, radius R=10 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 295: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection From A Straight Line To The Contour: Appr Lct

    8 APPR LCT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 R10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, radius R=10 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 296: Departing In A Straight Line With Tangential Connection: Dep Lt

    Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LN LEN+20 F100 Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN=20 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 297: Departing On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Dep Ct

    Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LCT X+10 Y+12 R+8 F100 Coordinates PN, arc radius=8 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 298: Path Contours  Cartesian Coordinates

    Straight line or circular «Path contours – FK free programming path with any connection contour programming «, to the preceding contour page 317 element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 299: Straight Line L

    Select the NC block after which you want to insert the straight line block Press the actual position capture key The control generates a straight-line block with the actual position coordinates. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 300: Inserting A Chamfer Between Two Straight Lines

    A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that CHF block. After the CHF block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 301: Rounded Corners Rnd

    A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that RND block. After the RND block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 302: Circle Center Cc

    The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center: The tool does not move to this position. The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 303: Circular Path C Around Circle Center Cc

    The maximum value for input tolerance is 0.016 mm. Set the input tolerance in the machine parameter circleDeviation (no. 200901). Smallest possible circle that the control can traverse: 0.016 mm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 304: Circle Cr With Defined Radius

    However, you can also program circular arcs that do not lie in the active working plane. By simultaneously rotating these circular movements you can create spatial arcs (arcs in three axes). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 305
    11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR- (arc 1) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR+ (arc 2) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR- (arc 3) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR+ (arc 4) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 306: Circle Ct With Tangential Connection

    A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 307: Example: Linear Movements And Chamfers With Cartesian Coordinates

    14 DEP LT LEN10 F1000 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection 15 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 16 END PGM LINEAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 308: Example: Circular Movements With Cartesian Coordinates

    16 DEP LCT X-20 Y-20 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM CIRCULAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 309: Example: Full Circle With Cartesian Coordinates

    10 DEP LCT X-40 Y+50 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM C-CC MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 310: Path Contours — Polar Coordinates

    Combination of a circular and a Polar radius, polar angle of the linear movement arc end point, coordinate of the end point in the tool axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 311: Datum For Polar Coordinates: Pole Cc

    If the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise: PA<0 Example 12 CC X+45 Y+25 13 LP PR+30 PA+0 RR F300 M3 14 LP PA+60 15 LP IPA+60 16 LP PA+180 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 312: Circular Path Cp Around Pole Cc

    Example 12 CC X+40 Y+35 13 L X+0 Y+35 RL F250 M3 14 LP PR+25 PA+120 15 CTP PR+30 PA+30 16 L Y+0 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 313: Helix

    Internal thread Work direction Direction of rotation Radius compensation Right-hand DR– Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– Left-hand Z– External thread Right-hand DR– Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– Left-hand Z– HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 314
    Example: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 12 CC X+40 Y+25 13 L Z+0 F100 M3 14 LP PR+3 PA+270 RL F50 15 CP IPA-1800 IZ+5 DR- HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 315: Example: Linear Movement With Polar Coordinates

    15 DEP PLCT PR+60 PA+180 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 17 END PGM LINEARPO MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 316: Example: Helix

    10 DEP CT CCA180 R+2 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM HELIX MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 317: Path Contours — Fk Free Contour Programming

    FK programming graphics. The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 318
    NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach. Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL command. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 319: Fk Programming Graphics

    Showing block numbers in the graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR. soft key to SHOW (soft-key row 3) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 320: Initiating The Fk Dialog

    The control displays the axis soft keys of the active working plane. Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys The pole for FK programming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 321: Free Straight Line Programming

    To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key To initiate the dialog, press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 322: Free Circular Path Programming

    To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key To initiate the dialog, press the FCT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 323: Input Possibilities

    Adapt imported NC programs if required Example 27 FLT X+25 LEN 12.5 AN+35 RL F200 28 FC DR+ R6 LEN 10 AN-45 29 FCT DR- R15 LEN 15 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 324
    Rotational direction of the arc Radius of an arc Example 10 FC CCX+20 CCY+15 DR+ R15 11 FPOL X+20 Y+15 12 FL AN+40 13 FC DR+ R15 CCPR+35 CCPA+40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 325
    FK section. Beginning of CLSD+ contour: End of contour: CLSD– Example 12 L X+5 Y+35 RL F500 M3 13 FC DR- R15 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+35 17 FC DR- R+15 CLSD- HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 326: Auxiliary Points

    X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc Distance of auxiliary point to circu- lar arc Example 13 FC DR- R10 P1X+42.929 P1Y+60.071 14 FLT AN-70 PDX+50 PDY+53 D10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 327: Relative Data

    Polar coordinates relative to block N Example 12 FPOL X+10 Y+10 13 FL PR+20 PA+20 14 FL AN+45 15 FCT IX+20 DR- R20 CCA+90 RX 13 16 FL IPR+35 PA+0 RPR 13 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 328
    N Example 12 FL X+10 Y+10 RL 13 FL … 14 FL X+18 Y+35 15 FL … 16 FL … 17 FC DR- R10 CCA+0 ICCX+20 ICCY-15 RCCX12 RCCY14 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 329: Example: Fk Programming 1

    Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L X-30 Y+0 R0 FMAX 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM FK1 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 330: Example: Fk Programming 2

    19 DEP LCT X+30 Y+30 R5 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM FK2 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 331: Example: Fk Programming 3

    23 RND R5 24 FL X+65 Y-25 AN-90 25 FC DR+ R50 CCX+65 CCY-75 26 FCT DR- R65 27 FSELECT 1 28 FCT Y+0 DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0 29 FSELECT 4 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 332
    Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 31 L X-70 R0 FMAX 32 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 33 END PGM FK3 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 333: Data Transfer From Cad Files

    Data Transfer from CAD Files…

  • Page 334: Screen Layout Of The Cad Viewer

    The control displays the following file formats: File Type Format Step .STP and .STEP AP 203 AP 214 IGES .IGS and .IGES Version 5.3 .DXF R10 to 2015 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 335: Cad Import (Option 42)

    Further information: «File names», page 176 The control does not support binary DXF format. Save the DXF file in ASCII format in the CAD or drawing program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 336: Using The Cad Viewer

    Klartext program by copy and paste using the clipboard. If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

  • Page 337: Basic Settings

    The active + symbol is the same as the pressed Shift key, and the active – symbol is the same as the pressed CTRL key. The active cursor symbol is the same as the mouse HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 338
    In addition, you must remove the comments that the CAD-Viewer inserts into the contour program. The control displays the active basic settings in the status bar of the screen. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 339: Setting Layers

    Alternatively, use the space key Show a layer: Select the layer with the left mouse button, and click its check box to show it Alternatively, use the space key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 340: Setting A Preset

    The control sets the preset symbol at the selected location. You can adjust the orientation of the coordinate system, if required. Further information: «Adjusting the orientation of the coordinate system», page 341 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 341
    In the Element Information window, the control shows how far the preset you have chosen is located from the drawing datum, and how this reference system is oriented with respect to the drawing. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 342: Defining The Datum

    The control sets the preset symbol at the selected location. You can adjust the orientation of the coordinate system, if required. Further information: «Adjusting the orientation of the coordinate system», page 343 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 343
    Left-click an element that is approximately in the positive Y direction The control aligns the Y and Z axes and displays them in green and blue in the list view. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 344
    Data Transfer from CAD Files | CAD import (option 42) Element information In the Element Information window, the control shows how far the datum you have chosen is located from the workpiece preset. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 345: Selecting And Saving A Contour

    Layer: Indicates the layer you are currently on Type: Indicates the current element type, e.g. line Coordinates: Shows the starting point and end point of an element, and circle center and radius where appropriate HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 346
    The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more contours, press the Cancel Selected Elements soft key and select the next contour as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 347
    If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a circular arc, then the control extends or shortens the contour element along the same arc. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 348
    To rapidly magnify or reduce any area: Rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards To return to the standard display: Double-click with the right mouse key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 349: Selecting And Saving Machining Positions

    (L X… Y… Z… F MAX M99). You can also transfer this program to older TNC controls and run it there. The point tables (.PNT) of the TNC 640 and iTNC 530 are not compatible. Transferring and processing on the other control type in each case may lead to problems and unforeseen performance.

  • Page 350
    The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 351
    The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 352
    The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 353
    Display the next larger diameter found Display the largest diameter found (default setting) You can have the tool paths displayed by clicking the SHOW TOOL PATH icon. Further information: «Basic settings», page 337 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 354
    To return to the standard display, press the shift key and simultaneously double-click with the right mouse button. The rotation angle is maintained if you only double-click with the right mouse button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 355: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

    Subprograms and Program Section Repeats…

  • Page 356: Labeling Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

    Do not use a label number or label name more than once! Label 0 (LBL 0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 357: Subprograms

    Write subprograms after the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 in the part program, they will be executed at least once even if they are not called HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 358: Programming The Subprogram

    Ignore repeats REP by pressing the NO ENT key. Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL 0 is not permitted (Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 359: Program-Section Repeats

    The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats, because the first repeat starts after the first machining process. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 360: Programming A Program Section Repeat

    If you want to use a LABEL name, press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry Enter the number of repeats REP and confirm with the ENT key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 361: Any Desired Nc Program As Subprogram

    Select an NC program with SEL PGM Call the last selected file with CALL SELECTED Select any NC program with SEL CYCLE as a fixed cycle Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 362: Operating Sequence

    If the called NC program contains the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30, then the control displays a warning. The control automatically clears the warning as soon as you select another NC program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 363: Calling Any Program As A Subprogram

    As a rule, Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM CALL. So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program also influence the calling program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 364
    Enter the path name with the keyboard Press the SELECT FILE soft key The control shows a selection window that allows you to select the program to be called. Press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 365
    FN 18 function (ID10 NR110 and NR111) Further information: «FN 18: SYSREAD – Reading system data», page 402 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 366: Nesting

    Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 19 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls: 19, where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 367: Subprogram Within A Subprogram

    45. End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS. 5 Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 368: Repeating Program Section Repeats

    (including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27). 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 369: Repeating A Subprogram

    This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice. 4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 up to block 19. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 370: Programming Examples

    Return jump to LBL 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM PGMWDH MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 371: Example: Groups Of Holes

    Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 17 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 18 LBL 0 End of subprogram 1 19 END PGM UP1 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 372: Example: Group Of Holes With Several Tools

    New plunging depth for drilling 11 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern 12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 13 TOOL CALL 3 Z S500 Reamer tool call HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 373
    Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 29 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 30 LBL 0 End of subprogram 2 31 END PGM SP2 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 375: Programming Q Parameters

    Programming Q Parameters…

  • Page 376: 10.1 Principle And Overview Of Functions

    0 to 99 Parameters for users 100 to 199 Parameters for HEIDENHAIN functions (e.g., cycles) 200 to 499 Parameters for the machine tool builder (e.g., cycles) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 377
    Only use Q parameter ranges recommended by HEIDENHAIN. Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. Check the machining sequence using a graphic simulation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 378: Programming Notes

    You can reset Q parameters to the status Undefined. If a position is programmed with a Q parameter that is undefined, the control ignores this movement. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 379: Calling Q Parameter Functions

    Then you define the parameter number. If you have a USB keyboard connected, you can press the Q key to open the dialog for entering a formula. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 380: Part Families-Q Parameters In Place Of Numerical Values

    Example: Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius: R = Q1 Cylinder height: H = Q2 Cylinder Z1: Q1 = +30 Q2 = +10 Cylinder Z2: Q1 = +10 Q2 = +50 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 381: Describing Contours With Mathematical Functions

    You can enter the following to the right of the = sign: Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 382: Programming Fundamental Operations

    FIRST VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter Q5 as the first value and confirm with the ENT key. SECOND VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter 7 as the second value and confirm with the ENT key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 383
    The FN 0 function also supports transfer of the value Undefined. If you wish to transfer the undefined Q parameter without FN 0, the control shows the error message Invalid value. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 384: Angle Functions

    Calculate and assign an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite and adjacent sides or with the sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle < 360°) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 385: 10.5 Calculation Of Circles

    (Y if spindle axis is Z) in parameter Q21, and the circle radius in parameter Q22. Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 386: 10.6 If-Then Decisions With Q Parameters

    Example: FN 9: IF+10 EQU+10 GOTO LBL1 Abbreviations used: Equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than GOTO Go to UNDEFINED Undefined DEFINED Defined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 387: Programming If-Then Decisions

    FN 12: IF LESS, JUMP e. g. FN 12: IF+Q5 LT+0 GOTO LBL «ANYNAME» If the first value or parameter is smaller than the second value or parameter, jump to specified label HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 388: 10.7 Checking And Changing Q Parameters

    If you want to check or edit local, global or string parameters, press the SHOW PARAMETERS Q QL QR QS soft key. The control then displays the specific parameter type. The functions previously described also apply. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 389
    The result of Q1 = COS 89.999 * 0.001 is shown by the control as +1.74532925e-08, whereby e-08 corresponds to the factor of 10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 390: Additional Functions

    Transfer up to eight values to the FN 37: EXPORTExport local Q parameters or QS parameters into a calling program FN 38: SEND Send information from the NC program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 391: Fn 14: Error: Displaying Error Messages

    1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 1016 Contradictory input 1017 CYCL incomplete 1018 Plane wrongly defined 1019 Wrong axis programmed 1020 Wrong rpm 1021 Radius comp. undefined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 392
    Pocket too large: scrap axis 2 1054 Stud too small: scrap axis 1 1055 Stud too small: scrap axis 2 1056 Stud too large: rework axis 1 1057 Stud too large: rework axis 2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 393
    1089 Slot position 0 not allowed 1090 Enter an infeed not equal to 0 1091 Switchover of Q399 not allowed 1092 Tool not defined 1093 Tool number not permitted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 394
    Plunging type is not possible 1105 Plunge angle incorrectly defined 1106 Angular length is undefined 1107 Slot width is too large 1108 Scaling factors not equal 1109 Tool data inconsistent HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 395: Fn16: F-Print — Formatted Output Of Texts And Q Parameter Values

    Format for text variable QS Format for integer Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character Line break Q parameter value, right-aligned Q parameter value, left-aligned HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 396
    Outputs text only for Polish conversational language L_HUNGARIA Outputs text only for Hungarian conversa- tional language L_CHINESE Outputs text only for Chinese conversational language L_CHINESE_TRAD Outputs text only for Chinese (traditional) conversational language HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 397
    «MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY»; «DATE: %02d.%02d.%04d»,DAY,MONTH,YEAR4; «TIME: %02d:%02d:%02d»,HOUR,MIN,SEC; «NO. OF MEASURED VALUES: = 1»; «X1 = %9.3F», Q31; «Y1 = %9.3F», Q32; «Z1 = %9.3F», Q33; HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 398
    MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE: July 15, 2015 TIME: 8:56:34 AM NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1 X1 = 149.360 Y1 = 25.509 Z1 = 37.000 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 399
    FN 18 (e.g., the number of the last touch probe cycle used). Further information: «FN 18: SYSREAD – Reading system data», page 402 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 400
    FN16-function with the following syntax: Input Function :’QS1′ Set the QS parameter with preceding colon and between single quotation marks :’QL3′.txt Specify additional file name extension for the target file if required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 401
    Printer: as the name of the log file and then enter the corresponding file name. The control saves the file in the PRINTER: path until the file is printed. Example 96 FN 16: F-PRINT TNC:MASKEMASKE1.A/PRINTER:DRUCK1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 402: Fn 18: Sysread — Reading System Data

    This function eliminates relative file paths. QS parameter Is there a directory with the name QS(IDX)? number 0 = no, 1 = Yes Only absolute directory paths are possible. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 403
    Programmed cutting speed in turning opera- tion Spindle mode in turning mode: 0 = constant speed 1 = constant cutting speed Coolant status M7: 0 = inactive, 1 = active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 404
    Q parameter number for the result (touch probe cycles 30 to 33) Q parameter type for the result (touch probe cycles 30 to 33) 1 = Q, 2 = QL, 3 = QR HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 405
    TT: Breakage tolerance for radius, RBREAK Tool no. Maximum speed NMAX Tool no. Point angle TANGLE Tool no. LIFTOFF allowed (0 = No, 1 = Yes) Tool no. Wear tolerance for radius R2TOL HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 406
    Timestamp of last use Tool no. Tool no. Pitch for thread cycles Tool no. AFC: reference load Tool no. AFC: overload early warning Tool no. AFC: overload NC stop HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 407
    Oversize for tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Automatic TOOL CALL 0 = Yes, 1 = No Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Cutting speed [mm/min] HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 408
    13 = Unload external tool, 14 = Unload internal tool, 15 = Unload special tool Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 = Yes, 0 = No HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 409
    0. Index 99 = active spindle Tool compensation 1 = without Active radius oversize 2 = with oversize 3 = with HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 410
    Projects the angle specified in the QL parameter from the input coordinate system to the tool coordinate system. If IDX is omitted, the angle 0 is used for projection. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 411
    Read the current position in the active coordinate system Axis Current nominal position in the input system Read the current position in the active coordinate system, including offsets (handwheel, etc.) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 412
    Axis Current system time System time in seconds that has elapsed since 01.01.1970, 00:00:00 (real time). System time in seconds that has elapsed since 01.01.1970, 00:00:00 (look-ahead calcu- lation). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 413
    January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 414
    00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: D.MM.YY Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: YYYY-MM-DD HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 415
    00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: h:mm Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: h:mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 416
    3 = Working plane coordinate system WPL — GPS: Shift in the workpiece system 0 = Off, 1 = On GPS: Axis offset 0 = Off, 1 = On HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 417
    Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Feed rate for pre-positioning: FMAX_PROBE or FMAX_MACHINE Maximum measuring range Set-up clearance Spindle orientation possible 0=No, 1=Yes Angle of spindle orientation in degrees HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 418
    Coordinate / Readout of the measurement results in the axis form of coordinates / axis values in the input system from probing operations. Compensation: only length Oriented spindle stop HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 419
    NC error 12 = Continuation with the row in the pallet table in which the NC error arose 13 = Continuation with the next pallet HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 420
    Feed-rate limit for high speeds (MP_maxG1Feed) in mm/min Max. jerk at low speeds (MP_maxPathJerk) in m/s Max. jerk at high speeds (MP_maxPath- JerkHi) in m/s Tolerance at low speeds (MP_pathTolerance) in mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 421
    DCM: Maximum tolerance for linear axes in cal axis mm (MP_maxLinearTolerance) Index of physi- DCM: Maximum angle tolerance in [°] cal axis (MP_maxAngleTolerance) Index of physi- Tolerance monitoring for successive threads cal axis (MP_threadTolerance) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 422
    (MP_maxPathAccHi) Index of physi- Compensation of following error in the jerk cal axis phase (MP_IpcJerkFact) Index of physi- kv factor of the position controller in 1/s cal axis (MP_kvFactor) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 423
    Oversize for tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool locked TL 0 = not locked, 1 = locked Number of the replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 424
    Read and write data of current turning tool Tool number Tool length XL Tool length YL Tool length ZL Tool length oversize DXL Oversize in tool length DYL Tool length oversize DZL Tooth radius (RS) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 425
    Z component of the Z direction X component of the X direction Y component of the X direction Z component of the X direction Type of angle definition: Angle 1 Angle 2 Angle 3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 426
    If the tool selected by these rules is locked, a replacement tool will be returned. –1: No tool with the specified name found in the tool table or all qualifying tools are locked. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 427
    0 = simulation 2-D graphics during programming active? 1 = yes 0 = no Generate graphics during programming (soft key AUTO DRAW) active? 1 = yes 0 = no HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 428
    0 = no 1 = yes M101 active (visible condition)? 0 = no 1 = yes M136 active? 0 = no 1 = yes HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 429
    FOR SYNC. Input no. PLC input Output no. PLC output Counter no. PLC counter Timer no. PLC timer Byte no. PLC byte Word no. PLC word Double-word PLC double word HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 430
    TS probe type from TYPE column of the touch probe table (tchprobe.tp) Type of TT tool touch probe from CfgTT/type. Key name of the active tool touch probe TT from CfgProbes/activeTT. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 431
    Read data of the current tool (system string) 10950 Current tool name. Example: Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25. 55 FN 18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NR4 IDX3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 432: Fn 19: Plc — Transfer Values To The Plc

    Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. The FN 19: PLC function transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 433: Fn 20: Wait For — Nc And Plc Synchronization

    NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block. Example: Pause internal look-ahead calculation, read current position in the X axis 32 FN 20: WAIT FOR SYNC 33 FN 18: SYSREAD Q1 = ID270 NR1 IDX1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 434: Fn 29: Plc — Transfer Values To The Plc

    Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. The FN 29: PLC function transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 435: Fn 37: Export

    For more detailed information, consult the Remo Tools SDK manual. Example Document values from Q1 and Q23 in the log. FN 38: SEND /»Q parameter Q1: %f Q23: %f» / +Q1 / +Q23 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 436: 10.9 Accessing Tables With Sql Commands

    The saver is based on a transaction model. A transaction is made up of multiples steps that are executed together, thereby ensuring an orderly and defined processing of the table entries. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 437: Overview Of Functions

    Q parameters to the table SQL INSERT creates a new table row SQL SELECT reads out a single values from a table and does not open any transaction HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 438: Programming Sql Commands

    If this value is then use in an inch program for the purpose of positioning (L X+Q1800), then an incorrect position will be the result. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 439: Application Example

    1 faulty read operation The HANDLE QL1 syntax is the transaction designated by the QL1 parameter The value is copied from the so-called result set (intermediate memory) to the bound parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 440: Sql Bind

    Database: column name: define table name and table column (separate with . ) Table name: synonym or path with filename of the table Column name: name displayed in the table editor HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 441
    20 SQL Q5 «SELECT Meas_No,Meas_X,Meas_Y, Meas_Z FROM Tab_Example WHERE Meas_No<20» Example: selection of table rows with the WHERE function and Q parameters . . . 20 SQL Q5 «SELECT Meas_No,Meas_X,Meas_Y, Meas_Z FROM Tab_Example WHERE Meas_No==:’Q11’» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 442
    Less than or equal to <= Greater than > Greater than or equal to >= empty IS NULL Not empty IS NOT NULL Linking multiple conditions: Logical AND Logical OR HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 443
    9 SQL Q1800 «ALTER TABLE my_table ADD (WMAT2)» Insert table rows 9 SQL Q1800 «ALTER TABLE my_table DROP (WMAT2)» Delete table rows 9 SQL Q1800 «RENAME COLUMN my_table (WMAT2) TO Rename table column (WMAT3)» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 444
    Program the Q parameter containing the index The row (n=0) is read if nothing is specified The optional syntax elements IGNORE UNBOUND and UNDEFINE MISSING are intended for the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 445
    Database: Index for SQL result: Row number within the result set Program the row number directly Program the Q parameter containing the index The row (n=0) is assigned a value if none is specified HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 446
    Parameter No. for result (return value for the control): 0 successful transaction 1 successful transaction Database: SQL access ID: Define Q parameters for the HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 447
    Parameter No. for result (return value for the control): 0 successful transaction 1 successful transaction Database: SQL access ID: Define Q parameters for the HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 448
    HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) Database: Index to SQL result: Row that remains in the result set Program the row number directly Program the Q parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 449
    «Application example», page 439 Example 0 BEGIN PGM SQL MM 1 SQL SELECT QS1800 «SELECT WMAT FROM my_table Read and save a value WHERE NO==3» 2 END PGM SQL MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 450
    Q10 = ASIN 0.75 Arc cosine Inverse function of the cosine; determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse e.g., Q11 = ACOS Q40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 451
    When return value Q12 = 1, then Q50 > 0 When return value Q12 = -1, then Q50 < 0 Calculate modulo value (division remainder) e.g., Q12 = 400 % 360 result: Q12 = 40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 452
    2 Calculation step 3 to the third power = 27 3 Calculation 100 – 27 = 73 Distributive law Law of distribution with parentheses calculation a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 453
    OPENING PARENTHESIS soft key Enter 12 (Q parameter number) Select division Enter 13 (Q parameter number) Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example 37 Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 454
    When you use the STRING FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string. When you use the FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 455
    Press the SPEC FCT key Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the STRING FUNCTIONS soft key Press the DECLARE STRING soft key Example 37 DECLARE STRING QS10 = «Workpiece» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 456
    Example: QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12, QS13 and QS14 37 QS10 = QS12 || QS13 || QS14 Parameter contents: QS12: Workpiece QS13: Status: QS14: Scrap QS10: Workpiece Status: Scrap HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 457
    END key Example: Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11, use 3 decimal places 37 QS11 = TOCHAR ( DAT+Q50 DECIMALS3 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 458
    The first character of a text string starts internally at the 0-position Example: A four-character substring (LEN4) is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character (BEG2) 37 QS13 = SUBSTR ( SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 459
    Information for unbalance cycle, Path of the unbalance calibration table belonging to 10855 the active kinematics Tool data, 10950 Tool name DOC entry of the tool AFC control setting Tool-carrier kinematics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 460
    Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example: Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 37 Q82 = TONUMB ( SRC_QS11 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 461
    Example: Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13. Begin the search at the third place. 37 Q50 = INSTR ( SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 462
    END key Example: Find the length of QS15 37 Q52 = STRLEN ( SRC_QS15 ) If the selected string parameter is not defined the control returns the result -1. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 463
    +1: The first QS parameter follows the second QS parameter alphabetically Example: QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority 37 Q52 = STRCOMP ( SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 464
    KEY_QS: Group name (key) of the machine parameter TAG_QS: Object name (entity) of the machine parameter ATR_QS: Name (attribute) of the machine parameter IDX: Index of the machine parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 465
    Assign string parameter for key 15 QS12 = «CfgDisplaydata» Assign string parameter for entity 16 QS13 = «axisDisplay» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 QS1 = Read out machine parameter CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 IDX3 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 466
    Assign string parameter for key 15 QS12 = «CfgGeoCycle» Assign string parameter for entity 16 QS13 = «pocketOverlap» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 Q50 = CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 ) Read out machine parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 467
    Tool radius R (tool table or TOOL DEF block) Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block The control remembers the current tool radius even if the power is interrupted. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 468
    Dimensional data of the main program Parameter value Metric system (mm) Q113 = 0 Imperial system (inch) Q113 = 1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 469
    Tilting the working plane with spatial (workpiece) angles instead of spindle head angles: Coordinates for rotary axes calculated by the control. Coordinates Parameter value A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis Q122 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 470
    Parameter value Rotation about the A axis Q170 Rotation about the B axis Q171 Rotation about the C axis Q172 Workpiece status Parameter value Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap Q182 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 471
    Q601 = 1 Error Q601 = 2 No monitoring area defined or not enough Q601 = 3 reference images Internal errs (no signal, camera fault, etc) Q601 = 10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 472
    22 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 23 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Account for rotational position in the plane 24 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+Q8 25 Q35 = (Q6 -Q5) / Q7 Calculate angle increment HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 473
    43 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 44 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 45 L Z+Q12 R0 FMAX Move to set-up clearance 46 LBL 0 End of subprogram 47 END PGM ELLIPSE MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 474
    Call machining operation 18 FN 0: Q10 = +0 Reset allowance 19 CALL LBL 10 Call machining operation 20 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 475
    Reset the datum shift 50 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 51 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 52 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 53 LBL 0 End of subprogram 54 END PGM CYLIN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 476
    Account for allowance in the sphere radius 28 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of sphere 29 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+Q1 30 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 477
    Reset the datum shift 55 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 56 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 57 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 58 LBL 0 End of subprogram 59 END PGM SPHERE MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 479
    Miscellaneous Functions…
  • Page 480
    In this case, the dialog is continued for the parameter input. In the Manual operation and Electronic handwheel operating modes, the M functions are entered with the M soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 481
    M (miscellaneous) function in a STOP block: To program an interruption of program run, press the STOP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example 87 STOP M6 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 482
    ■ Tool change Spindle STOP Program STOP ■ Coolant ON ■ Coolant OFF ■ Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON ■ Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON ■ Same as M2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 483
    The coordinate values on the control screen reference the machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF . Further information: «Status displays», page 98 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 484
    Further information: «Showing the workpiece blank in the working space «, page 815 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 485
    If the M130 function is combined with a cycle call, the control will interrupt the execution with an error message. Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius compensation. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 486
    15 L IX+100 … Move to contour point 15 16 L IY+0.5 … R… F… M97 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 17 L X… Y… Move to contour point 17 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 487
    M98 becomes effective at the end of the block. Example: Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession 10 L X… Y… RL F 11 L X… IY… M98 12 L IX+ … HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 488
    Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min): 17 L X+20 Y+20 RL F500 M103 F20 18 L Y+50 19 L IZ-2.5 20 L IY+5 IZ-5 21 L IX+50 22 L Z+5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 489
    If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the control changes the feed rate accordingly. Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of the block. You can cancel M136 by programming M137. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 490
    The initial state is restored after finishing or canceling a machining cycle. Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of the block. M109 and M110 can be canceled with M111. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 491
    PGM CALL the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or with the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 492
    Before using the functions listed below, you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation: Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 19 Working plane PLANE function M114 M128 TCPM FUNCTION HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 493
    The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard. Effect To cancel handwheel positioning, program M118 once again without coordinate input. M118 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 494
    For this purpose, program at least the spindle axis with its permitted range of traverse in the M118 function (e.g. M118 Z5) and select the VT axis on the handwheel. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 495
    Effect M140 is effective only in the NC block in which itis programmed. M140 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 496
    There is a danger of collision during these compensating movements! Do not combine M118 with M140 when using machines with head rotation axes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 497
    M141 functions only for movements with straight-line blocks. Effect M141 is effective only in the NC block in which M141 is programmed. M141 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 498
    M143 becomes effective at the start of the block. M143 deletes the entries in columns SPA, SPB, and SPC in the preset table; reactivating the corresponding preset table line does not activate the deleted basic rotation. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 499
    When a power interruption occurs Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149. M148 becomes effective at the start of the block, M149 at the end of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 500
    Effect The M197 function acts blockwise and is only effective on outside corners. Example L X… Y… RL M197 DL0.876 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 501
    Special Functions…
  • Page 502
    You can rapidly navigate with the cursor or mouse and select functions in the tree diagram. The control displays online help for the selected function in the window on the right. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 503
    Define a complex contour See Cycle- formula Programming User’s Manual Define regular machining pattern See Cycle- Programming User’s Manual Select the point file with machin- See Cycle- ing positions Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 504
    Define dwell time in seconds or page 580 revolutions Lift off tool at NC stop page 581 Define Dynamic Collision Monitor- page 505 ing DCM Add comments page 208 Choose path interpretation page 640 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 505
    There is a danger of collision during execution! Check the machining sequence using a graphic simulation Carefully test the NC program or program section in the Program run, single block operating mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 506
    Modify the graphic display of the collision objects in the Test Run operating mode as follows: Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key Modify the graphic display of the collision objects using the following functions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 507
    To return to the standard display: Press the shift key and simultaneously double-click with the right mouse key. The rotation angle is maintained if you only double-click with the right mouse key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 508
    Further information: «Activating and deactivating collision monitoring», page 512 Note the general limitations of the Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) function. Further information: «Function», page 505 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 509
    Select the Test Run operating mode Press the Collision Monitoring ON soft key You can toggle collision monitoring only after the simulation has been stopped. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 510
    (e.g. for eccentric turning), the control cannot perform collision monitoring. If at least one axis operates with following error or is not referenced, the control cannot perform collision monitoring. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 511
    Special Functions | Dynamic Collision Monitoring (option 40) Note the general limitations of the Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) function. Further information: «Function», page 505 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 512
    Press the Go to soft key Select the condition for which the selected operating modes should apply: Inactive: Deactivate collision monitoring Active: Activate collision monitoring Press the Ok soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 513
    512 Symbols Symbols in the status display show the condition of collision monitoring: Icon Function Collision monitoring active Collision monitoring is not available Collision monitoring is not active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 514
    The tool carrier templates may consist of several sub- files. If the sub-files are incomplete, the control will display an error message. Do not use incomplete tool carrier templates! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 515
    If the tool carrier template does not contain any transformation vectors, names, test points and measurement points, the additional ToolHolderWizard tool does not execute any function when the corresponding icons are activated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 516
    Output file area Press the GENERATE FILE button If required, reply to the message on the control Press the CLOSE icon The control closes the additional tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 517
    Output file area Press the GENERATE FILE button If required, reply to the message on the control Press the CLOSE icon The control closes the additional tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 518
    Select the desired tool carrier using the preview screen Press the OK soft key The control copies the name of the selected tool carrier to the KINEMATIC column Exit the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 519
    Additive basic rotat. (W-CS) page 526 Shift (W-CS) page 527 Mirroring (W-CS) page 528 Shift (mW-CS) page 529 Rotation (WPL-CS) page 530 Handwheel superimp.: page 531 Feed rate factor page 535 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 520
    (DCM), then the control must be in a stopped or interrupted state. Further information: «General status display», page 98 As an alternative you can deactivate Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM). Further information: «Activating and deactivating collision monitoring», page 512 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 521
    NC program is selected in the file management. Then you can simply acknowledge the message with Ok or call the form directly with CHANGE DATA. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 522
    As an alternative, use form elements to deactivate a setting possibility Further information: «Using the form», page 523 Press the Ok soft key The control applies the settings and closes the form HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 523
    Apply actual values of Handwheel superimp.: to the shifts Prerequisite: The coordinate system for Handwheel superimp.: and for Displacement concur You can also easily navigate through the form with a mouse. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 524
    There is a danger of collision during subsequent machining! Test the behavior at the machine If necessary, reset the preset after the offsets have been activated (mandatory for table rotary axes) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 525
    The control considers the 180° rotation for all C axis positioning movements. The control takes the modified tool position into account. The position of the C axis does not affect the preset position. The preset remains unchanged! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 526
    Open the Global Program Settings function Activate the Additive basic rotat. (W-CS) option, specifying 90° Reselect the NC program The control considers the 90° rotation for all axis positioning movements. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 527
    Global Program Settings function) The Shift (W-CS) values are displayed on the GS tab of the additional status display, the values from the NC program on the TRANS tab. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 528
    With PLANE AXIAL, the mirroring of rotary axes is irrelevant. For the TCPM function with axis angles, all axes to be mirrored must be marked explicitly in the form. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 529
    NC program (e.g. Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT), the same way as it is done for an active Shift (W-CS). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 530
    The value is added to the rotation defined in the NC program (e.g. Cycle 10 ROTATION). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 531
    If no coordinate system transformations were activated using either the NC program or the Global Program Settings function, Handwheel superimp.: is effective in the same way in all coordinate systems. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 532
    Handwheel superimp.: and during the subsequent machining operations! Before exiting the form, always make sure to explicitly select the Machine Coordinate System (M-CS). Test the behavior at the machine HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 533
    M118 from the NC program, you should activate Handwheel superimp.: in the Global Program Settings function prior to selecting the program. This ensures that the control uses the Global Program Settings function rather than M118. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 534
    Handwheel superimp.: in virtual axis direction VT requires neither one of the PLANE functions nor the TCPM function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 535
    Program Settings function) Result of all modifications = current feed rate The control displays the value of the feed rate factor on the GS tab of the additional status display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 536
    Cutting conditions are changed particularly by: Tool wear Fluctuating cutting depths that occur especially with cast parts Fluctuating hardness caused by material flaws HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 537
    This helps to prevent further damage after a tool breaks or is worn out. Protection of the machine’s mechanical elements Timely feed rate reduction and shutdown responses help to avoid machine overload. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 538
    Feed rate for traverse when the tool moves into or out of the material. Enter the value in percent with respect to the programmed feed rate. Maximum input value: 100 % HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 539
    Value that the control is to transfer to the PLC at the beginning of a machining step. The machine manufacturer defines the function, so refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 540
    The control displays a list with table formats. table format and confirm with the ENT key Select the AFC.TAB The control creates the table that contains the control settings. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 541
    LOAD value with the FUNCTION AFC CUT BEGIN function. If you program both values, the control will use the value programmed in the NC program! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 542
    AFC column. Further information: «Defining basic AFC settings», page 538 Besides the data from the AFC.TAB table, the control also saves the following additional information in the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file: HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 543
    Your machine tool builder will either make a function available for this, or will integrate this possibility in the functions for switching on the spindle. The functions for starting and ending a machining step are machine-dependent. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 544
    If the determined reference load is greater than 2 %, the control changes the status from teach-in (L) to controlling (C). Adaptive feed control is not possible for smaller values. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 545
    In order to edit the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file, you must first set the file manager so that all file types can be displayed (SELECT TYPE soft key). Further information: «Files», page 175 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 546
    ON—the control displays the AFC symbol in the position display Further information: «Status displays», page 98 To deactivate the adaptive feed control: Set the soft key to OFF HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 547
    The control shows various pieces of information in the additional status display when adaptive feed control is on. Further information: «Additional status displays», page 100 In addition, the control shows the icon in the position display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 548
    The control enters the results of the evaluation between the key words total and saved in the last line of the log file. Where the time balance is positive, the percentage value is also positive. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 549
    If the AFC.TAB columns FMIN and FMAX each have a value of 100%, adaptive feed control is deactivated but cut-related tool load monitoring remains active. Further information: «Entering tool data into the table», page 242 and page 538 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 550
    ACC is also advantageous during standard roughing. When you use the ACC feature, you must enter the number of tool cuts CUT for the corresponding tool in the TOOL.T tool table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 551
    Further information: «Status displays», page 98 To deactivate ACC: Set the soft key to OFF If ACC is active, the control shows the icon in the position display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 552
    You must deactivate the parallel-axis functions before switching the machine kinematics. You can deactivate the programming of parallel axes with the machine parameter noParaxMode (no. 105413). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 553
    Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Select the FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY function Define the parallel axis whose movements the control is to take into account in the position display of the associated principal axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 554
    (no. 300203). Your machine tool builder can also activate the PARAXCOMP functions permanently using a machine parameter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 555
    Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF. If you want to switch off the parallel-axis functions only for individual parallel axes, then the respective axis must be specifically indicated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 556
    & character. The axis with the & character then refers to the principal axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 557
    Your machine tool builder will define the calculation of possible offset values (X_OFFS, Y_OFFS and Z_OFFS from the preset table) for the axes positioned with the operator in the presetToAlignAxis machine parameter & (no. 300203). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 558
    Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Select FUNCTION PARAX Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 559
    10 FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF Restore standard axis configuration 11 L Z+0 W+0 R0 FMAX M91 Reset the principal axis and minor axis 12 L M30 13 END PGM PAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 560
    If you try to copy a file that does not exist, the control generates an error message. FILE DELETE does not generate an error message if you try to delete a non-existing file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 561
    Incremental values always refer to the datum which was last valid (this may be a datum which has already been shifted). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 562
    DATUM TABLE block, then the control uses the datum table previously selected with SEL TABLE or the datum table activated in the Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence operating mode (status M). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 563
    Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Select transformations Select the TRANS DATUM datum shift Press the RESET DATUM SHIFT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 564
    If necessary, note down the counter value and enter it again via the MOD menu after execution. You can use Cycle 225 to engrave the current counter value into the workpiece. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 565
    51 FUNCTION COUNT INC Increment the counter value 52 FUNCTION COUNT REPEAT LBL 11 Repeat the machining operations if more parts are to be machined. 53 M30 54 END PGM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 566
    Move cursor one word to the right Move cursor one word to the left Go to next screen page Go to previous screen page Cursor at beginning of file Cursor at end of file HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 567
    Soft key Function Delete and temporarily store a line Delete and temporarily store a word Delete and temporarily store a character Insert a line or word from temporary storage HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 568
    Press the READ FILE soft key. The control displays the File name = dialog message. Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 569
    Find text : dialog prompt Enter the text that you wish to find To find text: press the FIND soft key. Exit the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 570
    TNC:systemproto directory. Then your template will also be available in the list box for table templates when you create a new table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 571
    Navigation using the control’s keyboard: Press the navigation keys to go to the entry fields. Use the arrow keys to navigate within an entry field. To open pop-down menus, press the GOTO key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 572
    This moves the cursor to the left window, and you can select the desired line with the arrow keys. Press the green navigation key to switch back to the input window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 573
    The table to be opened must have the extension .TAB. Example: Open the table TAB1.TAB, which is saved in the directory TNC:DIR1. 56 FN 26: TABOPEN TNC:DIR1TAB1.TAB HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 574
    Q parameters Q5, Q6 and Q7 . 53 Q5 = 3.75 54 Q6 = -5 55 Q7 = 7.5 56 FN 27: TABWRITE 5/»RADIUS,DEPTH,D» = Q5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 575
    The names of tables and table columns must start with a letter and must not contain an arithmetic operator (e.g., +). Due to SQL commands, these characters can cause problems when inputting data or reading it out. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 576
    Define speed change SCALE The control never exceeds a programmed speed limit. The spindle speed is maintained until the sinusoidal curve of the S-PULSE FUNCTION falls below the maximum speed once more. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 577
    Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION SPINDLE soft key Press the RESET SPINDLE-PULSE soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 578
    Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION FEED soft key Press the FEED DWELL soft key Define the interval duration for dwelling D-TIME Define the interval duration for cutting F-TIME HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 579
    Press the RESET FEED DWELL soft key You can also reset the dwell time by entering D-TIME 0. The control automatically resets the FUNCTION FEED DWELL function at the end of a program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 580
    Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key FUNCTION DWELL soft key Press the DWELL TIME soft key Define the duration in seconds Alternatively, press the DWELL REVOLUTIONS soft key Define the number of spindle revolutions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 581
    Lift-off in the tool axis direction with M148 Further information: «Automatically retracting the tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148», page 499 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 582
    Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION LIFTOFF soft key Press the LIFTOFF ANGLE TCS soft key Enter the SPB angle HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 583
    Press the FUNCTION LIFTOFF soft key Press the LIFTOFF RESET soft key You can also reset the lift-off with M149. The control automatically resets the FUNCTION LIFTOFF function at the end of a program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 585
    Multiple-Axis- Machining…
  • Page 586
    Reduce display value of rotary axes M128 Define the behavior of the control when positioning the rotary axes M138 Selection of tilted axes M144 Calculate machine kinematics LN blocks Three-dimensional tool compensation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 587
    The mirrored rotary axis has no effect on the tilt specified in the PLANE function used, because only the movement of the rotary axis is mirrored HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 588
    0. The control only supports tilting the working plane with spindle axis Z. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 589
    PLANE function. While the animation plays, the control highlights the soft key of the selected PLANE function with a blue color. Soft key Function Switch on the animation mode Select the desired animation (highlighted in blue) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 590
    In the Distance-To-Go display (ACTDST and REFDST) the control shows, during tilting (MOVE or TURN mode) in the rotary axis, the distance to go to the calculated final position of the rotary axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 591
    It does not need to be defined more than once. Deactivate tilting in the Manual operation operating mode in the 3D ROT menu. Further information: «Activating manual tilting:», page 786 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 592
    The result is identical for both perspectives, as the following comparison shows. Example PLANE SPATIAL SPA+45 SPB+0 SPC+90 … A-B-C C-B-A Home position A0° B0° C0° Home position A0° B0° C0° A+45° C+90° B+0° B+0° C+90° A+45° HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 593
    Spatial angle C?: Rotational angle SPC about the (non-tilted) Z axis. Input range from -359.9999 to +359.9999 Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 594
    You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 595
    «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 Example 5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR+24 PROMIN+24 ROT+30 ..Abbreviations used: PROJECTED Projected PROPR Principal plane PROMIN Minor plane Rotation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 596
    The 0° axis is the X axis Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 Example 5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 ..HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 597
    X axis shift- ed by the precession angle EULROT Rotation angle: angle describing the rotation of the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 598
    This behavior is independent of the configuration of the machine parameters. You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 599
    If the normal vector has no X component, the base vector corresponds to the original X axis If the normal vector has no Y component, the base vector corresponds to the original Y axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 600
    5 PLANE VECTOR BX0.8 BY-0.4 BZ-0.42 NX0.2 NY0.2 NZ0.92 .. Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning VECTOR Vector BX, BY, BZ Base vector : X, Y, and components NX, NY, NZ Normal vector : X, Y, and components HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 601
    Point 1 and Point 2 (right-hand rule). You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 602
    «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 Example 5 PLANE POINTS P1X+0 P1Y+0 P1Z+20 P2X+30 P2Y+31 P2Z+20 P3X+0 P3Y+41 P3Z+32.5 ..Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning POINTS Points HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 603
    Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 Example 5 PLANE RELATIV SPB-45 ..Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning RELATIVE Relative to HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 604
    The SEQ, TABLE ROT and COORD ROT functions have no effect in conjunction with PLANE AXIAL. The PLANE AXIAL function does not take basic rotation into account. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 605
    Input range: –99999.9999° to +99999.9999° Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 606 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning AXIAL In the axial direction HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 606
    The mirrored rotary axis has no effect on the tilt specified in the PLANE function used, because only the movement of the rotary axis is mirrored HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 607
    FAUTO (feed rate from the TOOL CALL block). If you use PLANE together with STAY, you have to position the rotary axes in a separate block after the PLANE function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 608
    MB MAX positions the tool just before the software limit switch. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 609
    Define and activate the PLANE function 14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 F2000 Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by the control. Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 610
    3 If only one solution is within the traverse range, the control selects this solution 4 If neither solution is within the traverse range, the control displays the Entered angle not permitted error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 611
    If no free rotary axis is created in a tilting situation, the COORD ROT and TABLE ROT transformation types have no effect With the PLANE AXIAL function the COORD ROT and TABLE ROT transformation types have no effect HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 612
    If no transformation type was specified, the control uses the COORD ROT transformation type for the PLANE functions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 613
    B axis before tilting the working plane is maintained Because the workpiece was not positioned, the control aligns the working plane coordinate system according to the programmed spatial angle SPB+20 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 614
    TOOL CALL 5 Z S4500 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-90 SPC+0 STAY The tilt angle must be precisely adapted to the tool angle, otherwise the control will generate an error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 615
    13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-45 SPC+0 MOVE DIST50 Define and activate the PLANE function F1000 14 M128 Activate M128 15 L IB-17 F1000 Set the incline angle Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 616
    14 M128 Activate M128 15 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165 NX+0.3 NY+0 NZ Set the incline angle with the normal vector +0.9539 F1000 M3 Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 617
    M116 is effective in the working plane. Reset M116 with M117. At the end of the program, M116 is automatically canceled. M116 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 618
    10° +20° 10° 340° –30° Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of the block. To cancel M126, enter M127. At the end of program, M126 is automatically canceled. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 619
    C axis to the programmed value L C+180 FMAX M94 Effect M94 is effective only in the NC block where it is programmed. M94 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 620
    If M128 is active, the control shows the TCPM symbol in the status display The TCPM or M128 function cannot be used in conjunction with the Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) function and the additional M118 function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 621
    Enter M129 to cancel M128. The control will also cancel M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode. Example: Feed rate of 1000 mm/min for compensation movements L X+0 Y+38.5 IB-15 RL F125 M128 F1000 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 622
    HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 623
    M138 becomes effective at the start of the block. You can cancel M138 by reprogramming it without specifying any axes. Example Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C. L Z+100 R0 FMAX M138 C HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 624
    M144 becomes effective at the start of the block. M144 does not work in connection with M128 or the Tilt Working Plane function. You can cancel M144 by programming M145. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 625
    NC program for possible contour damages. Defining FUNCTION TCPM Select the special functions Select the programming aids Select FUNCTION TCPM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 626
    13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP … Feed rate refers to the tool tip 14 FUNCTION TCPM F CONT … Feed rate is interpreted as the speed of the tool along the contour HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 627
    Rotary axis coordinates are spatial angles 20 L A+0 B+45 C+0 F MAX Set tool orientation to B+45 degrees (spatial angle). Define space angle A and C with 0 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 628
    13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT PATHCTRL AXIS Tool tip moves along a straight line 14 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL VECTOR Tool tip and tool directional vector move in one plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 629
    The main goal of selecting this reference point is to enable machining of complex contours in turning mode with active radius compensation and simultaneously inclined tilting axes (simultaneous turning). Further information: «Simultaneous turning», page 705 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 630
    When you select a new NC program in the Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence operating modes, the control automatically cancels the TCPM function. Example 25 FUNCTION RESET TCPM Reset FUNCTION TCPM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 631
    (3D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation). Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 632
    > 0 Prog Behavior with M107 With M107 the control suppresses the error message. Effect M107 takes effect at the end of block. You can reset M107 with M108. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 633
    You can suppress the error message with the M107 function. The control will not warn you if there is a danger of contour damage due to tool oversizes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 634
    R2 + DR2 + DR2 = End mill Prog 0 < R2 + DR2 + DR2 < R: Toroid cutter Prog R2 + DR2 + DR2 = R: Radius cutter Prog HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 635
    NZ-0.8764339 F1000 M3 Straight line with 3-D compensation X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 636
    Program a safe tool position before the tilting movement, if necessary. Carefully test the NC program or program section in the Program run, single block operating mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 637
    Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector TX, TY, TZ: Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 638
    There are two ways to define the tool orientation: In an LN block with the components TX, TY and TZ In an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 639
    Straight line X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point B, C: Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orien- tation Radius Compensation Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 640
    DR2 for 3-D radius compensation. If you activate FUNCTION PROG PATH, the interpretation of the programmed path as the contour is effective for 3-D compensation movements until you deactivate the function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 641
    NR: Consecutive line number ANGLE: Measured angle in degrees DR2: Radius deviation from the nominal value The control evaluates a maximum of 100 lines in the compensation value table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 642
    NC program output at the south pole of the sphere requires tools measured on the tool tip NC program output at the center of the sphere requires tools measured on the tool center HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 643
    The basis for this is the real-time operating system HeROS 5 in conjunction with the ADP (Advanced Dynamic Prediction) function of the TNC 640. This enables the control to also efficiently process NC programs with high point densities. From 3-D model to NC program…
  • Page 644
    Avoid the output of the feed rate in every NC block. This would negatively influence the control’s velocity profile HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 645
    3 Q52 = 1350 ; FEED RATE FOR MILLING 25 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 26 L X+235 Y-25 FQ50 27 L Z+35 28 L Z+33.2571 FQ51 29 L X+321.7562 Y-24.9573 Z+33.3978 FQ52 30 L X+320.8251 Y-24.4338 Z+33.8311 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 646
    Normal tolerance in Cycle 32: Between 0.010 mm and 0.020 mm Normal chord error in the CAM system: Smaller than 0.005 mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 647
    L and permissible contour tolerance TA: T ~ K x L x TA K = 0.0175 [1/°] Example: L = 10 mm, TA = 0.1°: T = 0.0175 mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 648
    Tuning. Cycle 332 can be used to modify filter settings, acceleration settings, and jerk settings. Example 34 CYCL DEF 32.0 TOLERANCE 35 CYCL DEF 32.1 T0.05 36 CYCL DEF 32.2 HSC MODE:1 TA3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 649
    Improved reaction to negative effects (e.g. short, step-like stages, coarse chord tolerances, heavily rounded block end- point coordinates) in NC programs generated by CAM system Precise compliance to dynamic characteristics even in difficult conditions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 651
    Pallet Management…
  • Page 652
    Without a pallet changer you can use pallet tables to process NC programs with different presets in sequence with just one press of NC Start. The file name of a pallet table must always begin with a letter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 653
    Number of the pallet preset Optional field This entry is only required if pallet presets are used. W-STATUS Execution status Optional field This entry is only required for tool- oriented machining. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 654
    Insert as last line in the table Delete the last line in the table Add several lines at end of table Copy the current value Insert the copied value Select beginning of line HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 655
    Select end of line Find text or value Sort or hide table columns Edit the current field Sort by column contents Miscellaneous functions, e.g. saving Open file path selection HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 656
    Using the arrow keys, select the desired column. Press the INSERT COLUMN soft key Press the ENT key You can remove the column with the DELETE COLUMN soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 657
    Scroll through the NC program with the arrow keys Press the END PGM PAL soft key The control returns to the pallet table. A machine parameter defines how the control is to react after an error. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 658
    If you interrupt the processing of pallet tables, the control always suggests the previously selected NC block of the interrupted NC program for the BLOCK SCAN function. Further information: «Block scan in pallet programs», page 838 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 659
    If necessary, check the active pallet preset in the PAL tab Check the traverse movements of the machine Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 660
    Changing the machine statuses with a miscellaneous function (e.g. M13) Writing to the configuration (e.g. WRITE KINEMATICS) Traverse range switchover Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 800 Tilting the working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 661
    SP-B, SP-C, You can enter safety positions for the axes. The SP-U, SP-V, control only approaches these positions if the SP-W machine tool builder processes them in the NC macros. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 662
    If you want to start machining again, change the W-STATUS to BLANK. If you change the status in the PAL line, all FIX and PGM lines below this line are automatically changed, too. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 663
    Changing the machine statuses with a miscellaneous function (e.g. M13) Writing to the configuration (e.g. WRITE KINEMATICS) Traverse range switchover Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 800 Tilting the working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 665
    Batch Process Manager…
  • Page 666
    Times at which manual interventions in the machine are required The tool usage test function has to be enabled and switched on to ensure you get all information! Further information: «Tool usage test», page 263 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 667
    Pallet, Fixture or Program is locked Pallet or Fixture is not enabled for machin- This line is currently being processed in Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence and cannot be edited HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 668
    Edit opened job list Collapse or expand tree structure INSERT REMOVE Shows the soft keys INSERT BEFORE, INSERT AFTER and REMOVE Insert a new Pallet, Fixture or Program before the cursor position HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 669
    In the pallet management Further information: «Pallet Management», page 651 The control opens the pallet table (.p) in the Batch Process Manager as a job list. Directly in the Batch Process Manager HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 670
    Locked: Lock the selected line Editing possible: The selected line cannot be edited Confirm your entries by pressing the ENT key. Repeat the steps if required Press the EDIT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 671
    The following entries can be changed: Name Datum table Preset Locked Editing possible Confirm the edited entries by pressing the ENT key. The control adopts the changes. Press the EDIT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 672
    You can execute the job list using the pallet management Further information: «Processing pallet table», page 657 The control opens the job list as a pallet table in the pallet management (.p). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 673
    Turning…
  • Page 674
    This makes NC programs with turning functions largely exchangeable and independent of the machine model. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 675
    Clamp the workpiece in the spindle center Clamp workpiece securely Program low spindle speeds (increase as required) Limit the spindle speed (increase as required) Eliminate unbalance (calibrate) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 676
    In turning mode the measured values correspond to the X axis diameter values. You can also use the smartSelect function to define the turning functions. Further information: «Overview of special functions», page 502 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 677
    Press the SELECT KINEMATICS soft key Example 11 FUNCTION MODE TURN «AC_TABLE» Activate turning mode 12 FUNCTION MODE TURN Activate turning mode 13 FUNCTION MODE MILL «B_HEAD» Activate milling mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 678
    Workpiece blank definition 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+87 Y+1 Z+2 3 TOOL CALL 12 Tool call 4 M140 MB MAX Retract the tool 5 FUNCTION MODE TURN Activate Turning mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 679
    S: Nominal speed if no constant cutting speed is active (optional) S MAX: Maximum speed with constant cutting speed (optional). Reset with S MAX 0 GEARRANGE: Gear range for the turning spindle (optional) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 680
    3 FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN VCONST:ON VC:100 Definition of a constant cutting speed in gear range 2 GEARRANGE:2 3 FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN VCONST:OFF S550 Definition of a constant spindle speed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 681
    15 L Z-10 F200 Movement at a feed rate of 200 mm/min 19 M136 Feed rate in millimeters per revolution 20 L X+154 F0.2 Movement at a feed rate of 0.2 mm/1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 682
    Clamp the workpiece in the spindle center Clamp workpiece securely Program low spindle speeds (increase as required) Limit the spindle speed (increase as required) Eliminate unbalance (calibrate) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 683
    Unbalance Monitor function when you switch to turning mode. The unbalance monitor is effective until you switch back to milling mode. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 684
    Operating notes: To compensate an unbalance, several balancing weights at different positions may be required. After clamping a balancing weight, the unbalance must be checked again in a measurement. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 685
    With unbalance calibration, the rotary table is operated at various speeds with a defined weight mounted at a defined radial position. The measurement is repeated with different weights. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 686
    In addition to the tool number and tool name, the control also shows the ZL and XL columns from the turning tool table. Example 1 FUNCTION MODE TURN Turning mode selection 2TOOL CALL «TRN_ROUGH» Tool call HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 687
    Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the TURNING PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft Press the FUNCTION TURNDATA soft key Press the TURNDATA CORR soft key. Example 21 FUNCTION TURNDATA CORR-TCS:Z/X DZL:0.1 DXL:0.05 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 688
    Select the machine operating mode, e.g. Manual operation Press the TOOL TABLE soft key Press the TURNING TOOLS soft key Edit the turning tool table: Set the EDIT soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 689
    Type of turning tool: Roughing tool ROUGH, finish- ROUGH, FINISH, THREAD, ing tool FINISH, thread tool THREAD, recessing tool RECESS, BUTTON, RECTURN RECESS, button tool BUTTON, groove turning tool RECTURN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 690
    Current value of DXL Current calculated value for the tool New value of DZL New calculated value for the tool New value of DXL New calculated value for the tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 691
    Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual Example Input: Compens. value WPL-Z: 1 Compensation ØWPL-X: 1 Inclination angle ß: 90 Reverse the tool: Yes Result: DZL: +0.5 DXL: +1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 692
    Cutting radius Required Tool orientation Required Angle of orienta- Orientation angle Required tion CUTWIDTH Width of the recessing Required tool Oversize f. recessing tool Optional width TYPE Tool type Required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 693
    Wear compensation YL Optional Cutting radius Required Tool orientation Required Angle of orienta- Orientation angle Required tion T-ANGLE Tool angle Required P-ANGLE Point angle Required TYPE Tool type Required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 694
    Wear compensation XL Optional Wear compensation YL Optional Tool orientation Required Angle of orienta- Orientation angle Required tion T-ANGLE Tool angle Required P-ANGLE Point angle Required TYPE Tool type Required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 695
    Theoretical tool tip The theoretical tool tip is effective in the tool coordinate system. When the tool is inclined, the position of the tool tip rotates with the tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 696
    The virtual tool tip enables you to perform inclined paraxial longitudinal and transverse machining operations with high contour accuracy even without radius compensation. Further information: «Simultaneous turning», page 705 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 697
    Programming recessing and undercutting: Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the TURNING PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft Press the RECESS/ UNDERCUT soft key Press the GRV (recess) or UDC (undercut) soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 698
    Z coordinate, use a negative sign Example: Radial recess with depth=5, width=10, pos.= Z-15 21 L X+40 Z+0 22 L Z-30 23 GRV RADIAL CENTER-15 DEPTH-5 BREADTH10 CHF1 FAR_CHF1 24 L X+60 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 699
    UDC THREAD: Thread undercut in compliance with DIN 76 The control always interprets undercuts as form elements in the longitudinal direction. No undercuts are possible in the plane direction. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 700
    Example: Undercut form F with depth = 2, width = 15, depth of face = 1 21 L X+40 Z+0 22 L Z-30 23 UDC TYPE_F R1 DEPTH2 BREADTH15 FACEDEPTH1 24 L X+60 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 701
    Example: Undercut form K with depth = 2, width = 15, opening angle = 30° 21 L X+40 Z+0 22 L Z-30 23 UDC TYPE_K R1 DEPTH3 ANG_WIDTH30 24 L X+60 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 702
    Undercut angle Optional Example: Thread undercut according to DIN 76 with thread pitch = 2 21 L X+40 Z+0 22 L Z-30 23 UDC THREAD PITCH2 24 L X+60 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 703
    Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the TURNING PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft Press the FUNCTION TURNDATA soft key Press the TURNDATA BLANK soft key Press the BLANK OFF soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 704
    Workpiece coordinate system and align tool Q497=+90 ;PRECESSION ANGLE Q498=+0 ;REVERSE TOOL Q530=+2 ;INCLINED MACHINING Q531=-25 ;ANGLE OF INCIDENCE Q532=750 ;FEED RATE Q533=+1 ;PREFERRED DIRECTION Q535=3 ;ECCENTRIC TURNING Q536=0 ;ECCENTRIC W/O STOP HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 705
    Use the cutter radius oversize DRS to leave an equidistant oversize on the contour. Use FUNCTION TCPM and REFPNT TIP-CENTER to measure the theoretical tool tip of the turning tools being used for this. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 706
    30 CP PA-180 A+0 DR- 47 L X+100 Z-45 R0 FMAX Cancel radius compensation with R0 48 FUNCTION RESET TCPM Reset FUNCTION TCPM 49 FUNCTION MODE MILL 71 END PGM TURNSIMULTAN MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 707
    The COORD ROT and TABLE ROT functions, as well as SEQ refer to the XY plane. HEIDENHAIN recommends using the TURN positioning behavior. The MOVE positioning behavior is not the best option in combination with the facing slide. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 708
    In the Manual operation mode, move the facing slide with the U axis key. As the Tilt the working plane function is possible, pay attention to the 3-D ROT status HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 709
    Enter enter the feed rate, if required Example 7 FACING HEAD POS Activating without clearance height 7 FACING HEAD POS HEIGHT+100 FMAX Activating with positioning to clearance height Z+100 at rapid traverse HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 710
    Press the SPEC FCT key Press the TURNING PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft Press the FACING SLIDE soft key Press the ENT key Example 7 FUNCTION FACING HEAD OFF Deactivating the facing slide HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 711
    In turning mode it is not possible to insert replace- ment tools. If you define the overload reaction M, the control outputs an error message. POUT Entering the minimum load Pmin for tool breakage monitoring HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 712
    1 in the SENS column. Further information: «Tool wear monitoring», page 549 Further information: «Tool load monitoring», page 549 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 713
    Manual Operation and Setup…
  • Page 714
    The control carries out a self-test. If the control does not register an error, it displays the Traverse reference points dialog. If the control registers an error, it issues an error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 715
    Only confirm the pop-up window with YES if the axis positions match Despite confirmation, at first only move the axis carefully If there are discrepancies or you have any doubts, contact your machine tool builder HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 716
    Press and hold the axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed The control is now ready for operation in the Manual operation mode. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 717
    If the machine does not have any absolute encoders, the position of the rotary axes must be confirmed. The position shown in the pop-up window is the last position before the control was switched off. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 718
    Always shut down the control Only turn off the main switch after being prompted on the screen HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 719
    «Spindle speed S, feed rate F and miscellaneous function M», page 732 If a moving task is active on the machine, the control displays the control in operation symbol. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 720
    If you are in the Jog increment menu, you can switch off incremental jog positioning with the SWITCH OFF soft key. The input range for the infeed is from 0.001 mm to 10 mm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 721
    An active handwheel must be deactivated before another handwheel can be selected. Refer to your machine manual. This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 722
    NC STOP key (machine-dependent function, key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer) Handwheel Spindle speed potentiometer Feed rate potentiometer Cable connection, not available with the HR 550FS wireless handwheel HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 723
    STEP ON or OFF: Incremental jog active or inactive. If the function is active, the control additionally displays the current traversing step Soft-key row: Selection of various functions, described in the following sections HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 724
    If this happens you must reduce the distance to the handwheel holder in which the radio receiver is integrated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 725
    To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press END The MOD operating mode includes a function for commissioning and configuring the handwheel. Further information: «Configuring the HR 550FS wireless handwheel», page 877 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 726
    (only when incremental jog is not active). Selectable sensitivity levels: 0.001/0.002/0.005/0.01/0.02/0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5/1 [mm/revolution or degrees/revolution] Selectable sensitivity levels: 0.00005/0.001/0.002/0.004/0.01/0.02/0.03 [in mm/revolution or degrees/revolution] HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 727
    Move the active axis in the negative direction with the — key To deactivate the handwheel, press the handwheel key on the HR 5xx Now you can operate the control via the operating panel again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 728
    Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel The control issues a warning if the handwheel potentiometers are still active after the handwheel has been deactivated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 729
    10. By also pressing the CTRL key, you can increase the counting increment by a factor of 100 when pressing F1 or F2. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 730
    NC block after which the new traversing block is to be inserted Activate the handwheel Press the Generate NC block key on the handwheel The control inserts a complete traversing block containing all axis positions selected through the MOD function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 731
    Further information: «Returning to the contour», page 839 On/off switch for the Tilt working plane function (handwheel soft keys MOP and then 3D) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 732
    When 3D ROT is active the machining feed rate is shown if several axes are moved If 3D ROT is not active, the feed drive display remains empty if several axes are moved HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 733
    To activate the feed rate limit F MAX, proceed as follows: Operating mode: Press the Positioning w/ Manual Data Input key Press the F MAX soft key Enter the desired maximum feed rate Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 734
    In this chapter you will find explanations of the functions that are additionally available on a control with functional safety. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 735
    Safe operating stop. Provides protection against unexpected start of the drives Safely-limited speed. Prevents the drives from exceeding the specified speed limits when the protective door is opened HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 736
    Icon Safety-related operating mode SOM_1 operating mode active SOM_2 operating mode active SOM_3 mode active SOM_4 mode active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 737
    If necessary, move to a safe position before approaching the test positions Watch out for possible collisions Refer to your machine manual. The location of the test position is specified by your machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 738
    SOM_1 is active, the axes and spindles are brought to a stop, because only then will you be allowed to open the guard doors in SOM_1. Select the Manual operation mode Shift the soft-key row Switch on/off feed rate limit HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 739
    Never change the number of rows in the copied tables! If you want to reactivate the table, this may lead to problems. To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the TNC:table directory HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 740
    If the preset set manually is active, the control displays the text PR MAN(0) in the status display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 741
    (the row number is the preset number) If needed, select the column in the preset table that you want to change Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry possibilities HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 742
    If inch display is active: Enter the value in inches, and the control will internally convert the entered values to mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 743
    (2nd soft-key row) Insert a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft- key row) Delete a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft-key row) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 744
    Press the LOCK / UNLOCK PASSWORD soft key Enter the password in the pop-up window Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key: The control writes ### in the LOCKED column. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 745
    Press the LOCK / UNLOCK PASSWORD soft key Enter the password in the pop-up window Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key The control rescinds the write-protection. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 746
    Use Cycle 247 in order to activate presets from the preset table during program run. In Cycle 247 you define the number of the preset to be activated. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 747
    If the tool in the tool axis has already been set, set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 748
    If you try to set a preset in a locked axis, the control will issue either a warning or an error message, depending on what the machine tool builder has defined. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 749
    Always set a preset in all three principal axes. This clearly and correctly defines the preset. That way you also taken into account possible deviations resulting from the tilting of the axes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 750
    Setting the preset on any axis Set a corner as preset Set a circle center as preset Setting the centerline as preset Touch probe system data See Cycle Program- management ming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 751
    The control closes the pop-up window. Probe the second touch point If necessary, set the preset End the probing function If the handwheel is active you cannot start the probing cycles. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 752
    Probe hole (inside circle) automatically Probe stud (outside circle) automatically Probe a model circle (center point of several elements) Select a paraxial probing direction for probing of holes, studs and model circles HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 753
    Number of touch Number of probing operations (3 to 8) points? Angular length? Probing a full circle (360°) or a circle segment (angular length<360°) Automatic probing routine: Pre-position touch probe HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 754
    Take the starting angle of the first probing process into account in pre-positioning; for example, at a starting angle of 0° the control will first probe in the positive direction of the reference axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 755
    FN16DefaultPath (no. 102202), the control will store the TCHPRMAN.html file in the TNC: main directory. Operating notes: If you run several touch probes cycles in a row, the control stores the measured values below each other. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 756
    Enter the datum number in the Number in table? input field Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The control saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 757
    ENTRY IN LOCKED LINE soft key and enter the password to overwrite the active preset The control displays a note if a table row cannot be written to because of disabling. The probing function itself is not interrupted. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 758
    Measure the radius and the center offset using a stud or a calibration pin Measure the radius and the center offset using a calibration sphere 3-D calibrating (option 92) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 759
    Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect Press the CANCEL soft key to terminate the calibrating function. The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 760
    180°, and then executes another probing routine. The center offset (CAL_OF in tchprobe.tp) is determined in addition to the radius by probing from opposite orientations. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 761
    The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. Refer to your machine manual. In order to be able to determine ball-tip center misalignment, the control needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 762
    The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. Refer to your machine manual. In order to be able to determine ball-tip center misalignment, the control needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 763
    The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. Refer to your machine manual. In order to be able to determine ball-tip center misalignment, the control needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 764
    This is regardless of whether you want to use a touch-probe cycle in automatic mode or Manual operation mode. For more information about the touch probe table, refer to the User’s Manual for Cycle Programming HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 765
    SET BASIC ROTATION or SET TABLE ROTATION soft key. The behavior of the control during presetting depends on the setting in the machine parameter chkTiltingAxes (no. 204601). Further information: «Introduction», page 749 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 766
    Press the BASIC ROT. IN PRESET TABLE soft key If appropriate, the control opens the Overwrite active preset? menu. Press the OVERWRITE PRESET soft key The control saves the basic rotation in the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 767
    The control deletes the basic rotation from the preset table, and inserts the offset. Or press KEEP BASIC ROT. The control inserts the offset in the preset table, and the basic rotation also remains. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 768
    Or enter Offset of rotary table: 0 Apply with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Or apply with the SET TABLE ROTATION soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 769
    2nd point is on the reference axis, in a positive direction from the first point 3rd point is on the minor axis, in a positive direction of the desired workpiece coordinate system HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 770
    Press the BASIC ROT. IN PRESET TABLE soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key The control saves the 3-D basic rotation in the columns SPA, SPB, and SPC of the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 771
    Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING PL soft key Enter 0 for all angles Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 772
    With an active datum shift the determined value is with respect to the current preset (possibly a manual preset from the Manual operation mode). The datum shift is included in the position display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 773
    756 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 757 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 774
    756 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 757 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 775
    If you activate the offset, the control automatically writes the positions and the offset or only the positions to the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 776
    The control needs at least three touch points to calculate outside or inside circles, e.g. with circle segments. More precise results are obtained with four touch points. If possible, always pre-position the touch probe to the center. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 777
    To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key Once the probing routine is completed, the control displays the current coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 778
    756 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 757 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 779
    This way you can determine the positions once, and then store them in the principal axis as well as in the secondary axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 780
    Finding the coordinates of a corner point on the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point. Further information: «Corner as preset», page 774 The control displays the coordinates of the probed corner as preset. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 781
    You can measure The angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge; or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of max. 90°. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 782
    PA between the workpiece edges as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 783
    (option 8)», page 587 The control functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations. The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 784
    (3-D tool length compensation). The control only supports the Tilt working plane function in combination with the spindle axis Z. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 785
    Limitations on working with the tilting function The Actual-position capture function is not allowed if the Tilt working plane function is active PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not possible. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 786
    Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or the PLANE function in the machining program, the angle values defined there are in effect. Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 787
    Tilt working plane menu. Even if the 3D-ROT dialog in the Manual operation mode is set to Active, resetting the tilting (PLANE RESET) with an active basic transformation still functions correctly. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 788
    The behavior of the control during presetting depends on the setting in the optional machine parameter chkTiltingAxes (no. 204601): Further information: «Introduction», page 749 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 789
    As well as option number 136, a HEIDENHAIN camera system is required for VSC functions. You must create an adequate number of reference images to allow the system to compare the situation reliably. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 790
    In this phase, the control only issues a warning if it finds a deviation when comparing images. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 791
    Show current camera view Produce live image Open VSC file manager The control shows the data saved for Cycle 600 and Cycle 601. Open camera cover Close camera cover HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 792
    Configuring the field of view of the camera Refer to your machine manual. These settings can only be made after entering a code number. Go back to the previous screen HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 793
    All images: Display all images for this monitoring file Reference images: Only display reference images Images with error: Display all images where you have highlighted an error HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 794
    Change monitoring area or highlight an error Further information: «Configuration», page 795 Go back to the previous screen If you change the configuration, the control carries out an image evaluation. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 795
    The control indicates the clicked area with a frame. Shift the area if required by holding down the mouse button You can fix the drawn area by double-clicking it, thereby protecting it from unintentional shifting. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 796
    You have changed the monitoring data, monitoring is more sensitive. Blank circle: No error message: All deviations saved in the image have been recognized, monitoring has not identified any conflicts. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 797
    Positioning with Manual Data Input…
  • Page 798
    Editing an NC block Modifying Q parameter values with the Q INFO soft key Switching the operating modes Restore the contextual reference via repetition of the required NC blocks HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 799
    172 You can control and modify Q parameters with the soft keys Q PARAMETER LIST and Q INFO. Further information: «Checking and changing Q parameters», page 388 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 800
    Call the DRILLING cycle 6 L Z+200 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool 7 END PGM $MDI MM End of program Straight-line function: Further information: «Straight line L», page 299 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 801
    Select the rotary table axis, enter the rotation angle and feed rate you wrote down, e.g. L C +2.561 F50 Conclude entry Press the NC Start button: The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 802
    $MDI file, e.g.Hole Press the OK soft key. To exit the file manager, press the END soft key Further information: «Copying a single file», page 183 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 803
    Test Run and Program Run…
  • Page 804
    MOD menu Graphic settings you and decrease the Model quality and in that way increase the speed of simulation. If you are using a TNC 640 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…
  • Page 805
    You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program: Select the function for setting the simulation speed Select the desired function by soft key, e.g. incrementally increasing the simulation speed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 806
    Volume view and tool paths Tool paths Limitations during program run The simulation may contain errors if the control’s computing capacity is being fully utilized for complex machining tasks. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 807
    The high-resolution 3-D view enables you to display the surface of the machined workpiece in greater detail. Using a simulated light source, the control creates realistic light and shadow conditions. Press the 3-D view soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 808
    To return to the standard display: Press the shift key and simultaneously double-click with the right mouse key. The rotation angle is maintained if you only double-click with the right mouse key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 809
    Activate measuring If measuring is activated, the control shows the corresponding coordinates in close proxim- ity if you position the mouse cursor on the 3-D graphics of the workpiece. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 810
    A powerful zoom function is available in order for you to quickly recognize the details for the displayed tool paths. The control displays traverse movements in rapid traverse in red. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 811
    Select projection in three planes in the operating modes Program run, single block and Program run, full sequence: Press the GRAPHICS soft key Press the View on 3 Planes soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 812
    The sectional plan is automatically reset when the control is restarted. You can also move the sectional plane to its default position manually: Press the soft key for resetting the sectional planes soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 813
    Function Program run, full sequence / Program run, single block Test Run The control displays the tool in various colors: Red: Tool is in effect Blue: Tool is retracted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 814
    Select the desired function via soft key, e.g.,saving the displayed time Soft key Stopwatch functions Store displayed time Display the sum of stored time and displayed time Clear displayed time HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 815
    Display the current traverse range This shows the traverse ranges config- ured by the machine tool builder and can be selected accordingly. Switch monitoring function on or off Display machine reference point HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 816
    With BLK FORM CYLINDER, a cuboid is depicted as the workpiece blank in the working space With BLK FORM ROTATION , no workpiece blanks is depicted in the working space HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 817
    NC program in pages: Soft key Functions Go back one screen in the NC program Go forward one screen in the NC — program Select start of program Select end of program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 818
    Program a safe intermediate position after the tool change and before prepositioning Carefully test the NC program in the Program run, single block operating mode If possible, use the Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 819
    Test Run operating mode. This macro will simulate the exact behavior of the machine. In doing so, the machine tool builder often changes the simulated tool change position. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 820
    «Showing the workpiece blank in the working space «, page 815 Operating mode: Press the Test Run key Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 821
    In order to continue the test, the following actions must not be performed: Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program Selecting a new program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 822
    Modification before the interruption point: The simulation restarts at the beginning Modification after the interruption point: Positioning at the interruption point is possible with GOTO HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 823
    Starting the program run from a certain block Optional block skip Edit the tool table TOOL.T Checking and changing Q parameters Superimpose handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 824
    Program Run, Full Sequence Start the machining program with the NC Start key Program Run, Single Block Start each block of the machining program individually with the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 825
    Change setting for the optional programmed interruption with Change setting for the programmed skipping of NC blocks with During major errors, the control automatically aborts the program run (e.g., during a cycle call with stationary spindle). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 826
    Refer to your machine manual. The miscellaneous function M6 may also lead to a suspension of the program run. The machine manufacturer sets the functional scope of the miscellaneous functions. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 827
    The control shows the symbol for the exited inactive status in the status display Actions such as a change of operating mode are available again HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 828
    On some machines you may have to press the NC start key after the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key to enable the axis direction keys. Refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 829
    With an erasable error message: Remove the cause of the error Clear the error message from the screen: Press the CE key Restart the program, or resume program run where it was interrupted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 830
    The control selects the mode of traverse and the associated parameters automatically. If the traverse mode or the parameters have not been correctly preselected, you are unable to reset them manually. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 831
    Right-handed thread: the main spindle turns clockwise when moving into the workpiece, counter-clockwise when retracting from it; left-handed thread: main spindle turns counter-clockwise when moving into the workpiece and clockwise when retracting from it HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 832
    YES soft key. The control hides Retraction selectedmode. Initialize the machine: if required, cross the reference points Establish the desired machine condition: If required, reset the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 833
    The BLOCK SCAN function must not be used in conjunction with the following functions: Active stretch filter Touch probe cycles 0, 1, 3, and 4 during the search phase of mid-program startup HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 834
    After an internal stop, you would like to start in block 12 in the third machining operation of LBL 1. In the pop-up window enter the following data: Start-up at: N =12 Repetitions = 3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 835
    Press the CONTINUE BLOCK SCAN soft key Enter the NC block where you wish to start If you changed the machine status: Press the NC Start key Press the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 836
    Repetitions = 1 Press the NC start key until the control runs the NC block The control continues to run the subprogram and then returns to the main program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 837
    Enter the desired point number in the Point number = input field. The first point in the point pattern has the point number 0. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 838
    Press the ADVANCED soft key if required The control expands the pop-up window. Press the SELECT LAST BLOCK soft key to select the last saved interruption Press the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 839
    Repeat the process for all axes If the tool is located in the tool axis below the starting point, then the control offers the tool axis as the first traverse direction. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 840
    Time (hrs:min:sec): Time of day at which the program is to be started Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date on which the program is to be started To activate the start, press the OK HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 841
    Press the INSERT soft key Delete / symbol In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be erased Press the REMOVE soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 842
    Do not interrupt Program run or Test Run with blocks containing M1: Set the soft key to OFF Interrupt Program run or Test Run with blocks containing M1: Set the soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 843
    MOD Functions…
  • Page 844
    END key. Exiting MOD functions Exit the MOD functions: Press the END soft key or the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 845
    System settings Set the system time Define the network connection Network: IP configuration Diagnostic functions Bus diagnosis Diagnosis of Drives HEROS information General information Version information License information Machine times HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 846
    High High data transfer rate, exact depiction of tool geometry Medium Medium data transfer rate, approximation of tool geometry Low data transfer rate, coarse approximation of tool geometry HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 847
    You can change the Counter settings via soft key as follows: Soft key Meaning Reset count Increase count Lower count You can also enter the values directly with a connected mouse. Further information: «Defining a counter», page 564 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 848
    Proceed as follows to restrict external access: In the MOD menu, select the Machine settings group Select the External access menu Set the EXTERNAL ACCESS ON/OFF soft key to OFF Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 849
    Never Deny continuously Deny once In the overview list, an active connection is shown with a green symbol. Connections without access rights are shown gray in the overview list. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 850
    The settings are kept even after the control has been restarted. You can only deactivate the protection zone by deleting all values or pressing the EMPTY EVERYTHING soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 851
    Select the Tool-usage file menu Select the desired setting for the Program Run, Full Sequence/ Single Block and Test Run operating modes Press the APPLY soft key Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 852
    MOD function. When you select a kinematics model for the test run this does not affect machine kinematics. Ensure that you have selected the correct kinematics in the Test Run operating mode for checking your workpiece. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 853: System Settings

    Press the NTP off soft key in order to select the Synchronize the time over NTP server entry Enter hostnames or the URL of an TNP server Press the Add soft key Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

  • Page 854
    REF ACTL Reference position; actual position relative to the machine datum REF NOML Reference position; nominal position relative to the machine datum Servo lag; difference between nominal and actual positions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 855
    With the MOD function Position display 1, you can select the position display in the status display. With the MOD function Position display 2, you can select the position display in the additional status display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 856
    Program run Duration of controlled operation since being put into service Refer to your machine manual. The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 857
    The control requires a code number for the following functions: Function Code number Select user parameters Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enabling special functions for Q parameter 555343 programming HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 858
    Open the RS232 folder. The control then displays the following settings: Set BAUD RATE (baud rate no. 106701) You can set the BAUD RATE (data transfer speed) from 110 to 115 200 baud. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 859
    Set stop bits (stopBits no. 106705) The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize each transmitted character during serial data transmission. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 860
    With the state of the RTS line (optional), you can define whether the LOW level is active in idle state. TRUE: Level is LOW in idle state FALSE: Level is not LOW in idle state HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 861
    Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake: RTS_CTS File system for file operations HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 862
    Starting TNCremo under Windows Click on <Start>, <Programs>, <HEIDENHAIN Applications>, <TNCremo> When you start TNCremo for the first time, it automatically tries to set up a connection with the control. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 863
    Further information: «Available tool types», page 276 End TNCremo Select <File>, <Exit> You can open the context-sensitive help function of the TNCremo software by pressing the F1 key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 864
    Only active if a second, optional Ethernet interface is avail- able on the control hardware Computer Name displayed for the control in your compa- name ny network HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 865
    Only activate this function if the optionally available second Ethernet interface should be accessed externally for diagnostic purposes via the control. Only do so after instruction by our Service Department HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 866
    Option Manually configure the default gateway: Manually enter the IP addresses of the default gateway Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the Cancel button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 867
    Ask your network specialist for the proper value Group ID: Definition of the group identification with which you access files in the network. Ask your network specialist for the proper value HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 868
    IP address in the machine network. You can also select settings for these devices. Advanced options button: Additional settings for the DNS/DHCP server. Set stan- dard values button: Set factory settings. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 869
    Status log Display of status information and error messages. Press the Clear button to delete the contents of the Status Log window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 870
    Set the Active option to enable the firewall Press the Set standard values button to activate the default settings recommended by HEIDENHAIN. Exit the dialog with the OK button. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 871
    TeleService programs from HEIDENHAIN (e.g. screenshot). If this service is blocked, the VNC configuration dialog shows a warning from HEROS that VNC is disabled in the firewall. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 872
    IP address for a host name in the firewall. Advanced options These settings are only intended for your network specialists Set standard Resets the settings to the default values values recommended by HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 873
    Remove the battery from the touch probe Insert the battery into the touch probe The control connects to the touch probe and creates a new row in the table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 874
    The control creates a new row in the table. If necessary, highlight the row with the cursor Enter the touch probe data on the right side The control immediately saves the entered data in the machine parameters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 875
    You only need to change the signal strength if there is interference. Select the strength of the radio signal You only need to change the signal strength if there is interference. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 876
    Stylus deflected or not deflected Collision Collision or no collision recognized Battery status Display of the battery quality If the charge is less than the displayed bar, then the control outputs a warning. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 877
    Connect HW button. To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 878
    Click on the Set power button The control displays the three available power settings. Click on the desired setting. To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 879
    If this occurs, try to improve the transmission quality by selecting another channel or by increasing the transmitter power. Further information: «Setting the transmission channel», page 878 Further information: «Selecting the transmitter power», page 878 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 880
    Select the backup file in the control’s file manager (e.g., BKUP-2013-12-12_.zip) The control opens the pop-up window for the backup. Press Emergency Stop Press the OK soft key to start the backup process HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 881
    Tables and Overviews…
  • Page 882
    Proceed as follows in order to have the actual system names of the parameters be shown: Press the Screen layout key Press the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 883
    As well as the Help text, other information is displayed, e.g. unit of measurement, initial value, selection list. If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the previous control model, the corresponding MP number is displayed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 884
    M5: Display spindle position if spindle is in position control and with M5 Show or hide soft key preset table True: Soft key preset table is not displayed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 885
    Program input in HEIDENHAIN Klartext conversational text or in DIN/ISO HEIDENHAIN: Program input in operating mode MDI in Klartext conversational text dialog ISO: Program input in Positioning with MDI mode of operation in DIN/ISO HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 886
    CHINESE CHINESE_TRAD SLOVENIAN KOREAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH PLC dialog language See NC dialog language PLC error message language See NC dialog language Help language See NC dialog language HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 887
    ON: With new BLK form in the test run, the tool paths are reset OFF: With new BLK form in the test run, the tool paths are not reset HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 888
    Setting the coordinate systems for the display Coordinate system for the datum shift WorkplaneSystem: Datum is displayed in the system of the tilted plane, WPL-CS WorkpieceSystem: Datum is displayed in the workpiece coordinate system, W-CS HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 889
    ON: The mM-CS coordinate system can be selected WPL-CS coordinate system is selectable OFF: The WPL-CS coordinate system can not be selected ON: The WPL-CS coordinate system can be selected HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 890
    Maximum permissible measuring error with tool measurement 0.001 to 0.999 [mm]: Second maximum permissible measuring error NC stop during tool check True: NC program is stopped if breakage tolerance is exceeded HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 891
    0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around stylus for pre-positioning 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in plane perpendicular to tool axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 892
    Approach behavior on a slot wall in a cylindrical surface LineNormal: Approach with straight line CircleTangential: Approach with an arc movement M function for spindle orientation in machining cycles -1: Spindle orientation directly via NC HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 893
    Waiting time at reversal point in thread base –999999999 to 999999999: The spindle stops for this time at the bottom of the thread before starting again in the opposite direction of rotation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 894
    TRUE: For small thread depths the spindles speed is limited to the extent that for about 1/3 of the time it runs at a constant speed FALSE: No limitation of the spindle speed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 895
    TRUE: Paraxial positioning blocks permitted FALSE: Paraxial positioning blocks locked Line number up to which identical syntax elements are searched for 500 to 400000: Search for selected elements with up/down arrow keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 896
    FN 16 output path for Programming and Test Run operating modes Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program Serial Interface RS232 Further information: «Setting up data interfaces», page 858 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 897
    Yellow Green Green Brown Brown Signal GND Blue Gray Gray Pink Pink Do not Violet assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 898
    Signal GND Black Black Violet Violet Gray Gray White/ White/ Green Green Do not Green Green assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 899
    Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length: Unshielded: 100 m Shielded: 400 m Signal Description Transmit Data TX– Transmit Data REC+ Receive Data Vacant Vacant REC– Receive Data Vacant Vacant HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 900
    5 x USB (1 x front USB 2.0; 4 x rear USB 3.0) ■ Ambient temperature Operation: 5 °C to +40 °C ■ Storage: -20 °C to +60 °C HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 901
    Any text string in quotation marks (“”) Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 (5, 0) Error number in Q parameter function FN14 0 to 1199 (4, 0) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 902
    ■ Via circular arc ■ FK free contour programming FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 903
    Programming graphics In Programming mode, the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered (2-D pencil-trace graphics), even if another program is running HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 904
    ■ Compensation of workpiece misalignment, manual or automatic ■ Presetting, manual or automatic ■ Automatically measuring workpieces ■ Cycles for automatic tool measurement ■ Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 905
    CAD import Support for DXF , STEP and IGES Adoption of contours and point patterns Simple and convenient specification of presets Selecting graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 906
    Cycle 880: Gear hobbing (option 50 and option 131) Remote Desktop Manager (option 133) Remote operation of external Windows on a separate computer unit computer units Incorporated in the control’s interface HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 907
    Active Vibration Damping – AVD (option 46) Active vibration damping Damping of machine oscillations to improve the workpiece surface Batch Process Manager (option 154) Batch process manager Planning of production orders HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 908
    TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmis- sion ■ TT 160: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement ■ TT 460: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement with infrared transmission HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 909
    BORING ■ UNIVERSAL DRILLING ■ BACK BORING ■ UNIVERSAL PECKING ■ TAPPING ■ RIGID TAPPING ■ BORE MILLING ■ TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG ■ POLAR PATTERN ■ CARTESIAN PATTERN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 910
    TURN PLUNGE LONGITUDINAL EXT. ■ CONTOUR-PAR. TURNING ■ TURN CONTOUR TRANSV. ■ SHOULDER, FACE ■ SHOULDER, FACE. EXT. ■ TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE ■ TURN PLUNGE TRANSVERSE EXT. ■ THREAD CONTOUR-PARALLEL HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 911
    Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to a position defined by machine manufacturer, e.g. tool change position ■ Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360° HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 912
    NOMINAL positions at end of block ■ M145 Reset M144 ■ M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring ■ M148 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop ■ M149 Reset M148 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 913
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared 21.5 Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Specifications Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Control loops Maximum 24 control 18 maximum loops (including up to…
  • Page 914
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: PC software Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 M3D Converter for the creation of high- Available Not available resolution collision objects for collision monitoring (DCM) ConfigDesign…
  • Page 915
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks Three-Dimensional Tool Radius Compensation…
  • Page 916
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Constant contouring speed relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool’s cutting edge Parallel operation: Creating programs while another…
  • Page 917
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Q parameter programming: Standard mathematical functions Formula entry String processing Local Q parameters QL Nonvolatile Q parameters QR Changing parameters during program interruption FN15:PRINT –…
  • Page 918
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Graphic support 2-D programming graphics REDRAW function (REDRAW) – Show grid lines as the background – 3-D line graphics Test graphics (plan view, projection on 3 planes, 3-D…
  • Page 919
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Datum tables: Storing workpiece-specific datums Preset table Preset management Line 0 of the preset table can be edited manually – Pallet management…
  • Page 920
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 CAM support: Loading of contours from DXF data X, option 42 X, option 42 Load contours from Step data and Iges data X, option 42 –…
  • Page 921
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Status displays: Positions, spindle speed, feed rate Larger depiction of position display, Manual operation Additional status display, form view Display of the handwheel path during machining with…
  • Page 922
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Miscellaneous functions Effect TNC 640 iTNC 530 Program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/ Clear status display (depending on machine parameter)/Return jump to block 1…
  • Page 923
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Effect TNC 640 iTNC 530 M112 Enter contour transitions between any two contour transi- – (recommended: tions Cycle 32) M113 Reset M112 M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when –…
  • Page 924
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparator: Cycles Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 1 PECKING (recommended: Cycle 200, 203, 205) – 2 TAPPING (recommended: Cycle 206, 207 , 208) – 3 SLOT MILLING (recommended: Cycle 253) –…
  • Page 925
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING 206 TAPPING 207 RIGID TAPPING 208 BORE MILLING 209 TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG 210 SLOT RECIP. PLNG (recommended: Cycle 253) –…
  • Page 926
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 291 COUPLG.TURNG.INTERP. X, option 96 – 292 CONTOUR.TURNG.INTRP. X, option 96 – 800 ADJUST XZ SYSTEM X, option 50 – 801 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM X, option 50 –…
  • Page 927
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Touch probe cycles in the Manual operation and Electronic handwheel modes of operation Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 Touch-probe table for managing 3-D touch probes –…
  • Page 928
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Probing system cycles for automatic workpiece control Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 0 REF. PLANE 1 POLAR PRESET 2 CALIBRATE TS – 3 MEASURING 4 MEASURING IN 3-D 9 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH –…
  • Page 929
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 640 iTNC 530 430 MEAS. BOLT HOLE CIRC 431 MEASURE PLANE 440 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT – 441 FAST PROBING 444 PROBING IN 3-D X, option 92 –…
  • Page 930
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Skip block function Available Available Selecting a tool from the table Selection via split-screen menu Selection in a pop-up window Programming special functions with…
  • Page 931
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Datum table: Sorting function by values within Available Not available an axis Resetting the table Available Not available Hiding axes that are not present…
  • Page 932
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Handling of error messages: Call via ERR key Call via HELP key Help with error messages Switching the operating mode Help menu is closed when the…
  • Page 933
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Programming minor axes: Syntax FUNCTION PARAXCOMP: Available Not available Define the behavior of the display and the paths of traverse Syntax FUNCTION PARAXMODE:…
  • Page 934
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Test Run, operation Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Arrangement of soft-key rows and Arrangement of soft-key rows and soft-keys varies depending on the soft keys within the rows active screen layout.
  • Page 935
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Manual Operation, functionality Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Jog increment function The jog increment can be defined The jog increment applies for both…
  • Page 936
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Manual Operation, operation Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Capturing the position values from Confirm actual position with a soft Actual-position capture by hard key…
  • Page 937
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Program Run, traverse movements NOTICE Danger of collision! NC programs that were created older controls can lead to unexpected axis movements or error messages on current control models.
  • Page 938
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Q60 to Q99 (QS60 to QS99) areal- Q60 to Q99 (QS60 to QS99) Effect of Q parameters ways local. are local or global, depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs (.cyc).
  • Page 939
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 The incremental rotation angle IPA Circle programming with polar The algebraic sign of the direc- and the direction of rotation DR…
  • Page 940
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 SLII Cycles 20 to 24: Behavior with islands not Cannot be defined with Restricted definition in complex contained in pockets complex contour formula…
  • Page 941
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 PLANE function: TABLE ROT/COORD ROT Effect: Effect The transformation types are The transformation types are effective on all free rotary axes only effective with a C rotary…
  • Page 942
    Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 640 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in MDI operation Function TNC 640 iTNC 530 Execution of connected sequences Function available Function available Saving modally effective functions Function available Function available…
  • Page 943
    External access……848 Delete……..170 Data output on the screen..400 External data transfer….201 Block check character….860 Data transfer Block scan File system……860 In a pallet table….838 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 944
    MOD function……844 Closed contours….325 Graphic simulation….813 Exit……..844 Direction and length of contour Tool display……813 Overview……845 elements……323 GS……….519 Select……… 844 Input options Monitoring HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 945
    Radius compensation….267 Filter for hole positions..353 Overview……298 Entering……. 268 Selecting a contour….345 Polar coordinates Outside corners, inside Selecting machining positions..Circular path around pole CC……..312 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 946
    Tool change……260 Turning mode selection…. 675 Stop at……..822 Tool compensation….266 Turning Operations….674 Straight line…… 299, 311 Length……..266 Feed rate……681 String parameter Tool Compensation Turning operations HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 947
    Wireless touch probe Setup……..873 Working space monitoring..Workpiece positions….159 Workspace monitoring….. 820 Write to log……435 Writing probing values Log……..755 To the datum table….756 ZIP archive……. 196 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 640 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
  • Page 948
    The Information Site for DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH HEIDENHAIN Controls Dr.-Johannes-Heidenhain-Straße 5 83301 Traunreut, Germany  +49 8669 31-0  +49 8669 32-5061 Klartext App E-mail: info@heidenhain.de The Klartext on Your  +49 8669 32-1000 Technical support Mobile Device Measuring systems …

Вы здесь

Каталог инструкций » H » HEIDENHAIN » Оборудование HEIDENHAIN » HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 (34059x-05) » Страница инструкции 1

  • 1

  • 2

  • 3

  • 4

  • 5

  • 6

  • 7

  • 8

  • 9

  • 10

  • 11

  • 12

  • 13

  • 14

  • 15

  • 16

  • 17

  • 18

  • 19

  • 20

  • 21

  • 22

  • 23

  • 24

  • 25

  • 26

  • 27

  • 28

  • 29

  • 30

  • 31

  • 32

  • 33

  • 34

  • 35

  • 36

  • 37

  • 38

  • 39

  • 40

  • 41

  • 42

  • 43

  • 44

  • 45

  • 46

  • 47

  • 48

  • 49

  • 50

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • 5
  • 6
  • 7
  • 8
  • 9
  • ››

Распечатать

Страница 1 из

  • << Предыдущая
  • Следующая >>
Инструкция по эксплуатации HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 (34059x-05)

Tnc 640 в инструкции по эксплуатации HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 (34059x-05)

TNC 640

Руководство пользователя

«Диалог открытым текстом

HEIDENHAIN»

Программное обеспечение с ЧПУ 340590-05 340591-05 340595-05

Русский (ru) 5/2015

  • << Предыдущая
  • Следующая >>

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. HEIDENHAIN Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. TNC 640

Manuals and User Guides for HEIDENHAIN TNC 640. We have 4 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 manuals available for free PDF download: User Manual, Operating Instructions Manual

Heidenhain TNC 640 User Manual

Heidenhain TNC 640 User Manual (903 pages)

Brand: Heidenhain
|
Category: Control Panel
|
Size: 56.9 MB

Table of Contents
  • About this Manual

    6

  • New Functions 34059X

    13

  • The D18 Functions Have Been Expanded, See «D18 – Reading System Data

    20

  • Table of Contents

    35

  • First Steps with the TNC 640

    65

    • Overview

      66

    • Machine Switch-On

      66

    • Acknowledging the Power Interruption and Moving to the Reference Points

      66

    • Programming the First Part

      68

    • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

      68

    • The most Important Control Keys

      68

    • Opening a New Program/File Management

      69

    • Defining a Workpiece Blank

      70

    • Program Layout

      71

    • Programming a Simple Contour

      73

    • Creating a Cycle Program

      76

    • Graphically Testing the First Part

      78

    • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

      78

    • Selecting the Tool Table for the Test Run

      78

    • Choosing the Program You Want to Test

      79

    • Selecting the Screen Layout and the View

      79

    • Starting the Test Run

      80

    • Setting up Tools

      81

    • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

      81

    • Preparing and Measuring Tools

      81

    • The Tool Table TOOL.T

      82

    • The Pocket Table TOOL_P .TCH

      83

    • Workpiece Setup

      84

    • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

      84

    • Clamping the Workpiece

      84

    • Presetting with a 3-D Touch Probe

      85

    • Running the First Program

      86

    • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

      86

    • Choosing the Program You Want to Run

      86

    • Starting the Program

      86

  • Introduction

    87

    • The TNC 640

      88

    • HEIDENHAIN Klartext and DIN/ISO

      88

    • Compatibility

      88

    • Visual Display Unit and Operating Panel

      89

    • Display Screen

      89

    • Setting Screen Layout

      89

    • Control Panel

      90

    • Modes of Operation

      91

    • Manual Operation and El. Handwheel

      91

    • Positioning with Manual Data Input

      91

    • Programming

      92

    • Test Run

      92

    • Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block

      93

    • Status Displays

      94

    • General Status Display

      94

    • Additional Status Displays

      96

    • Window Manager

      103

    • Overview of Taskbar

      104

    • Portscan

      107

    • Remote Service

      108

    • Printer

      110

    • Selinux Security Software

      112

    • Vnc

      113

    • Backup and Restore

      115

    • Remote Desktop Manager (Option 133)

      118

    • Introduction

      118

    • Configuring Connections — Windows Terminal Service (Remotefx)

      119

    • Configuring the Connection — VNC

      121

    • Shutting down or Rebooting an External Computer

      122

    • Starting and Stopping the Connection

      123

    • Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels

      124

    • 3-D Touch Probes

      124

    • HR Electronic Handwheels

      125

  • Operating the Touchscreen

    127

    • Display Unit and Operation

      128

    • Touchscreen

      128

    • Operating Panel

      128

    • Gestures

      129

    • Overview of Possible Gestures

      129

    • Navigating in the Table and NC Programs

      130

    • Operating the Simulation

      131

    • Using the HEROS Menu

      132

    • Operating the CAD Viewer

      133

    • Functions in the Taskbar

      138

    • Touchscreen Calibration

      138

    • Touchscreen Configuration

      138

    • Touchscreen Cleaning

      139

  • Fundamentals, File Management

    141

    • Fundamentals

      142

    • Position Encoders and Reference Marks

      142

    • Reference Systems

      143

    • Designation of the Axes on Milling Machines

      154

    • Polar Coordinates

      154

    • Absolute and Incremental Workpiece Positions

      155

    • Selecting the Preset

      156

    • Creating and Writing Programs

      157

    • Structure of an NC Program in ISO Format

      157

    • Defining the Blank: G30/G31

      158

    • Creating a New NC Program

      161

    • Programming Tool Movements in DIN/ISO

      162

    • Actual Position Capture

      164

    • Editing an NC Program

      165

    • The Control’s Search Function

      169

    • File Management: Basics

      171

    • Files

      171

    • Displaying Externally Generated Files on the Control

      173

    • Data Backup

      173

    • Working with the File Manager

      174

    • Directories

      174

    • Paths

      174

    • Overview: Functions of the File Manager

      175

    • Calling the File Manager

      176

    • Selecting Drives, Directories and Files

      177

    • Creating a New Directory

      179

    • Creating New File

      179

    • Copying a Single File

      179

    • Copying Files into Another Directory

      180

    • Copying a Table

      181

    • Copying a Directory

      182

    • Choosing One of the Last Files Selected

      182

    • Deleting a File

      182

    • Deleting a Directory

      183

    • Tagging Files

      184

    • Renaming a File

      185

    • Sorting Files

      185

    • Additional Functions

      186

    • Additional Tools for Management of External File Types

      187

    • Additional Tools for Itcs

      195

    • Data Transfer to or from an External Data Carrier

      197

  • Programming Aids

    203

    • Adding Comments

      204

    • Application

      204

    • Entering Comments During Programming

      204

    • Inserting Comments after Program Entry

      204

    • Entering a Comment in a Separate Block

      204

    • Commenting out an Existing NC Block

      204

    • Functions for Editing of the Comment

      205

    • Freely Editing an NC Program

      206

    • Display of NC Programs

      207

    • Syntax Highlighting

      207

    • Scrollbar

      207

    • Structuring Programs

      208

    • Definition and Applications

      208

    • Displaying the Program Structure Window / Changing the Active Window

      208

    • Inserting a Structure Block in the Program Window

      209

    • Selecting Blocks in the Program Structure Window

      209

    • Calculator

      210

    • Operation

      210

    • Cutting Data Calculator

      213

    • Application

      213

    • Programming Graphics

      216

    • Activating and Deactivating Programming Graphics

      216

    • Generating a Graphic for an Existing Program

      217

    • Block Number Display ON/OFF

      218

    • Erasing the Graphic

      218

    • Showing Grid Lines

      218

    • Magnification or Reduction of Details

      219

    • Error Messages

      220

    • Display of Errors

      220

    • Opening the Error Window

      220

    • Closing the Error Window

      220

    • Detailed Error Messages

      221

    • INTERNAL INFO Soft Key

      221

    • FILTER Soft Key

      221

    • Clearing Errors

      222

    • Error Log

      222

    • Keystroke Log

      223

    • Informational Texts

      224

    • Saving Service Files

      224

    • Calling the Tncguide Help System

      224

    • Tncguide Context-Sensitive Help System

      225

    • Application

      225

    • Working with Tncguide

      226

    • Downloading Current Help Files

      230

  • Tools

    233

    • Entering Tool-Related Data

      234

    • Feed Rate F

      234

    • Spindle Speed S

      235

    • Tool Data

      236

    • Requirements for Tool Compensation

      236

    • Tool Number, Tool Name

      236

    • Tool Length L

      236

    • Tool Radius R

      236

    • Delta Values for Lengths and Radii

      237

    • Entering Tool Data into the NC Program

      237

    • Entering Tool Data into the Table

      238

    • Importing Tool Tables

      248

    • Overwriting Tool Data from an External PC

      250

    • Pocket Table for Tool Changer

      251

    • Calling the Tool Data

      254

    • Tool Change

      256

    • Tool Usage Test

      259

    • Tool Compensation

      262

    • Introduction

      262

    • Tool Length Compensation

      262

    • Tool Radius Compensation

      263

    • Tool Management (Option Number 93)

      266

    • Basics

      266

    • Calling Tool Management

      267

    • Editing Tool Management

      268

    • Available Tool Types

      272

    • Importing and Exporting Tool Data

      274

  • Programming Contours

    277

    • Tool Movements

      278

    • Path Functions

      278

    • FK Free Contour Programming

      278

    • Miscellaneous Functions M

      278

    • Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

      279

    • Programming with Q Parameters

      279

    • Fundamentals of Path Functions

      280

    • Programming Tool Movements for Workpiece Machining

      280

    • Approaching and Departing a Contour

      283

    • Starting Point and End Point

      283

    • Tangential Approach and Departure

      285

    • Overview: Types of Paths for Contour Approach and Departure

      286

    • Important Positions for Approach and Departure

      287

    • Approaching on a Straight Line with Tangential Connection: APPR LT

      289

    • Approaching on a Straight Line Perpendicular to the First Contour Point: APPR LN

      289

    • Approaching on a Circular Path with Tangential Connection: APPR CT

      290

    • Approaching on a Circular Path with Tangential Connection from a Straight Line to the Contour: APPR LCT

      291

    • Departing in a Straight Line with Tangential Connection: DEP LT

      292

    • Departing in a Straight Line Perpendicular to the Last Contour Point: DEP LN

      292

    • Departing on a Circular Path with Tangential Connection: DEP CT

      293

    • Departing on a Circular Arc Tangentially Connecting the Contour and a Straight Line: DEP LCT

      293

    • Path Contours  Cartesian Coordinates

      294

    • Overview of Path Functions

      294

    • Programming Path Functions

      294

    • Straight Line in Rapid Traverse G00 or Straight Line with Feed Rate F G01

      295

    • Inserting a Chamfer between Two Straight Lines

      296

    • Rounded Corners G25

      297

    • Circle Center I, J

      298

    • Circular Path Around Circle Center

      299

    • Circle G02/G03/G05 with Defined Radius

      300

    • Circle G06 with Tangential Connection

      302

    • Example: Linear Movements and Chamfers with Cartesian Coordinates

      303

    • Example: Circular Movements with Cartesian Coordinates

      304

    • Example: Full Circle with Cartesian Coordinates

      305

    • Path Contours — Polar Coordinates

      306

    • Overview

      306

    • Datum for Polar Coordinates: Pole I, J

      307

    • Straight Line in Rapid Traverse G10 or Straight Line with Feed Rate F G11

      307

    • Circular Path G12/G13/G15 Around Pole I, J

      308

    • Circle G16 with Tangential Connection

      308

    • Helix

      309

    • Example: Linear Movement with Polar Coordinates

      311

    • Example: Helix

      312

    • Path Contours — FK Free Contour Programming

      313

    • Fundamentals

      313

    • FK Programming Graphics

      315

    • Initiating the FK Dialog

      316

    • Pole for FK Programming

      316

    • Free Straight Line Programming

      317

    • Free Circular Path Programming

      318

    • Input Possibilities

      319

    • Auxiliary Points

      322

    • Relative Data

      323

    • Example: FK Programming 1

      325

  • Data Transfer from CAD Files

    327

    • Screen Layout of the CAD Viewer

      328

    • Fundamentals of the CAD Viewer

      328

    • CAD Import (Option 42)

      329

    • Application

      329

    • Using the CAD Viewer

      330

    • Opening the CAD File

      330

    • Basic Settings

      331

    • Setting Layers

      333

    • Setting a Preset

      334

    • Defining the Datum

      336

    • Selecting and Saving a Contour

      339

    • Selecting and Saving Machining Positions

      343

  • Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

    349

    • Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

      350

    • Label

      350

    • Subprograms

      351

    • Operating Sequence

      351

    • Programming Notes

      351

    • Programming the Subprogram

      352

    • Calling a Subprogram

      352

    • Program-Section Repeats

      353

    • Label G98

      353

    • Operating Sequence

      353

    • Programming Notes

      353

    • Programming a Program Section Repeat

      354

    • Calling a Program Section Repeat

      354

    • Any Desired NC Program as Subprogram

      355

    • Overview of the Soft Keys

      355

    • Operating Sequence

      356

    • Programming Notes

      356

    • Calling any Program as a Subprogram

      357

    • Nesting

      360

    • Types of Nesting

      360

    • Nesting Depth

      360

    • Subprogram Within a Subprogram

      361

    • Repeating Program Section Repeats

      362

    • Repeating a Subprogram

      363

    • Programming Examples

      364

    • Example: Milling a Contour in Several Infeeds

      364

    • Example: Groups of Holes

      365

    • Example: Group of Holes with Several Tools

      366

  • Programming Q Parameters

    369

    • 10.1 Principle and Overview of Functions

      370

    • Programming Notes

      372

    • Calling Q Parameter Functions

      373

    • Part Families-Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values

      374

    • Application

      374

    • Describing Contours with Mathematical Functions

      375

    • Application

      375

    • Overview

      375

    • Programming Fundamental Operations

      376

    • 10.4 Angle Functions

      378

    • Definitions

      378

    • Programming Trigonometric Functions

      378

    • 10.5 Calculation of Circles

      379

    • Application

      379

    • 10.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters

      380

    • Application

      380

    • Unconditional Jumps

      380

    • Programming If-Then Decisions

      381

    • 10.7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters

      382

    • Procedure

      382

    • Additional Functions

      384

    • Overview

      384

    • D14: Displaying Error Messages

      385

    • D16 — Formatted Output of Texts and Q Parameter Values

      389

    • D18 — Reading System Data

      395

    • D19 — Transfer Values to the PLC

      425

    • D20 — NC and PLC Synchronization

      426

    • D29 — Transfer Values to the PLC

      427

    • D37 — Export

      428

    • D38 — Send Information from NC Program

      428

    • Entering Formulas Directly

      429

    • Entering Formulas

      429

    • Rules for Formulas

      431

    • Example of Entry

      432

    • String Parameters

      433

    • String Processing Functions

      433

    • Assign String Parameters

      434

    • Chain-Linking String Parameters

      435

    • Converting a Numerical Value to a String Parameter

      436

    • Copying a Substring from a String Parameter

      437

    • Reading System Data

      438

    • Converting a String Parameter to a Numerical Value

      439

    • Testing a String Parameter

      440

    • Finding the Length of a String Parameter

      441

    • Comparing Alphabetic Priority

      442

    • Reading out Machine Parameters

      443

    • 10.11 Preassigned Q Parameters

      446

    • Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107

      446

    • Active Tool Radius: Q108

      446

    • Tool Axis: Q109

      447

    • Spindle Status: Q110

      447

    • Coolant On/Off: Q111

      447

    • Overlap Factor: Q112

      447

    • Unit of Measurement for Dimensions in the Program: Q113

      447

    • Tool Length: Q114

      448

    • Coordinates after Probing During Program Run

      448

    • Deviation between Actual Value and Nominal Value During Automatic Tool Measurement With, for Example, the TT 160

      448

    • Tilting the Working Plane with Spatial (Workpiece) Angles Instead of Spindle Head Angles: Coordinates for Rotary Axes Calculated by the Control

      448

    • Measurement Results from Touch Probe Cycles

      449

    • Checking the Setup Situation: Q601

      450

    • Programming Examples

      451

    • Example: Ellipse

      451

    • Example: Concave Cylinder Machined with Spherical Cutter

      453

    • Example: Convex Sphere Machined with End Mill

      455

Advertisement

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual (743 pages)

Brand: HEIDENHAIN
|
Category: Control Unit
|
Size: 11.42 MB

Table of Contents
  • Fundamentals | New Cycle Functions of Software 34059X

    3

  • Fundamentals | New and Changed Cycle Functions of Software 34059X

    4

  • New and Changed Cycle Functions of Software 34059X

    11

  • The Character Set of the Fixed Cycle 225 Engraving was

    12

  • The Character Set of the Fixed Cycle 225 Engraving was

    13

  • Table of Contents

    19

  • Fundamentals / Overviews

    53

  • Using Fixed Cycles

    57

    • Working with Fixed Cycles

      58

    • Machine-Specific Cycles

      58

    • Defining a Cycle Using Soft Keys

      59

    • Defining a Cycle Using the GOTO Function

      59

    • Calling a Cycle

      60

    • Program Defaults for Cycles

      63

    • Overview

      63

    • Entering GLOBAL DEF

      63

    • Using GLOBAL DEF Information

      64

    • Global Data Valid Everywhere

      65

    • Global Data for Drilling Operations

      65

    • Global Data for Milling Operations with Pocket Cycles 25X

      65

    • Global Data for Milling Operations with Contour Cycles

      65

    • Global Data for Positioning Behavior

      66

    • Global Data for Probing Functions

      66

    • PATTERN DEF Pattern Definition

      67

    • Application

      67

    • Entering PATTERN DEF

      68

    • Using PATTERN DEF

      68

    • Defining Individual Machining Positions

      69

    • Defining a Single Row

      69

    • Defining a Single Pattern

      70

    • Defining Individual Frames

      71

    • Defining a Full Circle

      72

    • Defining a Pitch Circle

      73

    • Point Tables

      74

    • Application

      74

    • Creating a Point Table

      74

    • Hiding Single Points from the Machining Process

      75

    • Selecting a Point Table in the Program

      75

    • Calling a Cycle in Connection with Point Tables

      76

  • Fixed Cycles: Drilling

    77

    • Fundamentals

      78

    • Overview

      78

    • CENTERING (Cycle 240, DIN/ISO: G240)

      79

    • Cycle Run

      79

    • Please Note While Programming

      79

    • Cycle Parameters

      80

    • DRILLING (Cycle 200)

      81

    • Cycle Run

      81

    • Please Note While Programming

      81

    • Cycle Parameters

      82

    • REAMING (Cycle 201, DIN/ISO: G201)

      83

    • Cycle Run

      83

    • Please Note While Programming

      83

    • Cycle Parameters

      84

    • BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202)

      85

    • Cycle Run

      85

    • Please Note While Programming

      86

    • Cycle Parameters

      87

    • UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/ISO: G203)

      88

    • Cycle Run

      88

    • Please Note While Programming

      91

    • Cycle Parameters

      92

    • BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO: G204)

      94

    • Cycle Run

      94

    • Please Note While Programming

      95

    • Cycle Parameters

      96

    • UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205)

      98

    • Cycle Run

      98

    • Please Note While Programming

      99

    • Cycle Parameters

      100

    • Position Behavior When Working with Q379

      102

    • BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)

      106

    • Cycle Run

      106

    • Please Note While Programming

      107

    • Cycle Parameters

      108

    • SINGLE-LIP DEEP-HOLE DRILLING (Cycle 241, DIN/ISO: G241)

      109

    • Cycle Run

      109

    • Please Note While Programming

      110

    • Cycle Parameters

      111

    • Position Behavior When Working with Q379

      113

    • 3.11 Programming Examples

      117

    • Example: Drilling Cycles

      117

    • Example: Using Drilling Cycles in Connection with PATTERN DEF

      118

  • Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling

    121

    • Fundamentals

      122

    • Overview

      122

    • TAPPING with a Floating Tap Holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO: G206)

      123

    • Cycle Run

      123

    • Please Note While Programming

      124

    • Cycle Parameters

      125

    • RIGID TAPPING Without a Floating Tap Holder (Cycle 207, DIN/ISO: G207)

      126

    • Cycle Run

      126

    • Please Note While Programming

      127

    • Cycle Parameters

      128

    • Retracting after a Program Interruption

      129

    • TAPPING with CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209)

      130

    • Cycle Run

      130

    • Please Note While Programming

      131

    • Cycle Parameters

      132

    • Fundamentals of Thread Milling

      134

    • Prerequisites

      134

    • THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO: G262)

      136

    • Cycle Run

      136

    • Please Note While Programming

      137

    • Cycle Parameters

      138

    • THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO: G263)

      139

    • Cycle Run

      139

    • Please Note While Programming

      140

    • Cycle Parameters

      141

    • THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264)

      143

    • Cycle Run

      143

    • Please Note While Programming

      144

    • Cycle Parameters

      145

    • HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265)

      147

    • Cycle Run

      147

    • Please Note While Programming

      148

    • Cycle Parameters

      149

    • OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267)

      151

    • Cycle Run

      151

    • Please Note While Programming

      152

    • Cycle Parameters

      153

    • 4.11 Programming Examples

      155

    • Example: Thread Milling

      155

  • Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling

    157

    • Fundamentals

      158

    • Overview

      158

    • RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251)

      159

    • Cycle Run

      159

    • Please Note While Programming

      160

    • Cycle Parameters

      162

    • CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252)

      164

    • Cycle Run

      164

    • Please Note While Programming

      166

    • Cycle Parameters

      168

    • SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253)

      170

    • Cycle Run

      170

    • Please Note While Programming

      171

    • Cycle Parameters

      172

    • CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254)

      174

    • Cycle Run

      174

    • Please Note While Programming

      175

    • Cycle Parameters

      177

    • RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256)

      180

    • Cycle Run

      180

    • Please Note While Programming

      181

    • Cycle Parameters

      182

    • CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257)

      185

    • Cycle Run

      185

    • Please Note While Programming

      186

    • Cycle Parameters

      187

    • POLYGON STUD (Cycle 258, DIN/ISO: G258)

      189

    • Cycle Run

      189

    • Please Note While Programming

      190

    • Cycle Parameters

      192

    • FACE MILLING (Cycle 233, DIN/ISO: G233)

      194

    • Cycle Run

      194

    • Please Note While Programming

      198

    • Cycle Parameters

      199

    • Programming Examples

      202

    • Example: Milling Pockets, Studs and Slots

      202

  • Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions

    205

    • Fundamentals

      206

    • Overview

      206

    • POLAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/ISO: G220)

      207

    • Cycle Run

      207

    • Please Note While Programming

      207

    • Cycle Parameters

      208

    • LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221, DIN/ISO: G221)

      210

    • Cycle Run

      210

    • Please Note While Programming

      210

    • Cycle Parameters

      211

    • Programming Examples

      212

    • Example: Polar Hole Patterns

      212

  • Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket

    215

    • SL Cycles

      216

    • Fundamentals

      216

    • Overview

      218

    • CONTOUR (Cycle 14, DIN/ISO: G37)

      219

    • Please Note While Programming

      219

    • Cycle Parameters

      219

    • Superimposed Contours

      220

    • Fundamentals

      220

    • Subprograms: Overlapping Pockets

      220

    • Area of Inclusion

      221

    • Area of Exclusion

      222

    • Area of Intersection

      223

    • CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20, DIN/ISO: G120)

      224

    • Please Note While Programming

      224

    • Cycle Parameters

      225

    • PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 21, DIN/ISO: G121)

      226

    • Cycle Run

      226

    • Please Note While Programming

      227

    • Cycle Parameters

      227

    • ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122)

      228

    • Cycle Run

      228

    • Please Note While Programming

      229

    • Cycle Parameters

      230

    • FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23, DIN/ISO: G123)

      232

    • Cycle Run

      232

    • Please Note While Programming

      233

    • Cycle Parameters

      233

    • SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24, DIN/ISO: G124)

      234

    • Cycle Run

      234

    • Please Note While Programming

      235

    • Cycle Parameters

      236

    • CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25, DIN/ISO: G125)

      237

    • Cycle Run

      237

    • Please Note While Programming

      238

    • Cycle Parameters

      239

    • THREE-D CONT. TRAIN (Cycle 276, DIN/ISO: G276)

      241

    • Cycle Run

      241

    • Please Note While Programming

      242

    • Cycle Parameters

      244

    • CONTOUR TRAIN DATA (Cycle 270, DIN/ISO: G270)

      246

    • Please Note While Programming

      246

    • Cycle Parameters

      246

    • TROCHOIDAL SLOT (Cycle 275, DIN/ISO: G275)

      247

    • Cycle Run

      247

    • Please Note While Programming

      249

    • Cycle Parameters

      250

    • Programming Examples

      252

    • Example: Roughing-Out and Fine-Roughing a Pocket

      252

    • Example: Pilot Drilling, Roughing-Out and Finishing Overlapping Contours

      254

    • Example: Contour Train

      256

  • Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface

    257

    • Fundamentals

      258

    • Overview of Cylindrical Surface Cycles

      258

    • CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/ISO: G127, Software Option 1)

      259

    • Cycle Run

      259

    • Please Note While Programming

      260

    • Cycle Parameters

      261

    • CYLINDER SURFACE Slot Milling (Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128, Software Option 1)

      262

    • Cycle Run

      262

    • Please Note While Programming

      263

    • Cycle Parameters

      265

    • CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge Milling (Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129, Software Option 1)

      266

    • Cycle Run

      266

    • Please Note While Programming

      267

    • Cycle Parameters

      268

    • CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 39, DIN/ISO: G139, Software Option 1)

      269

    • Cycle Run

      269

    • Please Note While Programming

      270

    • Cycle Parameters

      271

    • Programming Examples

      272

    • Example: Cylinder Surface with Cycle 27

      272

    • Example: Cylinder Surface with Cycle 28

      274

  • Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula

    275

    • SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula

      276

    • Fundamentals

      276

    • Selecting a Program with Contour Definitions

      278

    • Defining Contour Descriptions

      278

    • Entering a Complex Contour Formula

      279

    • Superimposed Contours

      280

    • Contour Machining with SL Cycles

      282

    • Example: Roughing and Finishing Superimposed Contours with the Contour Formula

      283

    • SL Cycles with Simple Contour Formula

      286

    • Fundamentals

      286

    • Entering a Simple Contour Formula

      288

    • Contour Machining with SL Cycles

      288

  • Cycles: Coordinate Transformations

    289

    • Fundamentals

      290

    • Overview

      290

    • Effectiveness of Coordinate Transformations

      290

    • DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G54)

      291

    • Effect

      291

    • Cycle Parameters

      291

    • Please Note While Programming

      291

    • DATUM SHIFT with Datum Tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53)

      292

    • Effect

      292

    • Please Note While Programming

      293

    • Cycle Parameters

      293

    • Selecting a Datum Table in the Part Program

      294

    • Editing the Datum Table in the Programming Mode of Operation

      294

    • Configuring a Datum Table

      296

    • Leaving a Datum Table

      296

    • Status Displays

      296

    • PRESETTING (Cycle 247, DIN/ISO: G247)

      297

    • Effect

      297

    • Please Note before Programming

      297

    • Cycle Parameters

      297

    • Status Displays

      297

    • MIRRORING (Cycle 8, DIN/ISO: G28)

      298

    • Effect

      298

    • Please Note While Programming

      299

    • Cycle Parameters

      299

    • ROTATION (Cycle 10, DIN/ISO: G73)

      300

    • Effect

      300

    • Please Note While Programming

      301

    • Cycle Parameters

      301

    • Scaling

      302

    • Effect

      302

    • Cycle Parameters

      302

    • AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26)

      303

    • Effect

      303

    • Please Note While Programming

      303

    • Cycle Parameters

      304

    • WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, Software Option 1)

      305

    • Effect

      305

    • Please Note While Programming

      306

    • Cycle Parameters

      307

    • Resetting

      307

    • Positioning the Axes of Rotation

      308

    • Position Display in a Tilted System

      309

    • Monitoring of the Working Space

      309

    • Positioning in a Tilted Coordinate System

      310

    • Combining Coordinate Transformation Cycles

      310

    • Procedure for Working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE

      311

    • Programming Examples

      312

    • Example: Coordinate Transformation Cycles

      312

  • Cycles: Special Functions

    315

    • Fundamentals

      316

    • Overview

      316

    • DWELL TIME (Cycle 9, DIN/ISO: G04)

      317

    • Function

      317

    • Cycle Parameters

      317

    • PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12, DIN/ISO: G39)

      318

    • Cycle Function

      318

    • Please Note While Programming

      318

    • Cycle Parameters

      318

    • SPINDLE ORIENTATION (Cycle 13, DIN/ISO: G36)

      319

    • Cycle Function

      319

    • Please Note While Programming

      319

    • Cycle Parameters

      319

    • TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62)

      320

    • Cycle Function

      320

    • Influences of the Geometry Definition in the CAM System

      320

    • Please Note While Programming

      321

    • Cycle Parameters

      322

    • INTERPOLATION TURNING, CONTOUR FINISHING (Cycle 292, DIN/ISO: G292, Software Option 96)

      323

    • Cycle Run

      323

    • Please Note While Programming

      325

    • Cycle Parameters

      327

    • Machining Variants

      328

    • Defining the Tool

      330

    • COUPLING INTERPOLATION TURNING (Cycle 291, DIN/ISO: G291, Software Option 96)

      333

    • Cycle Run

      333

    • Please Note While Programming

      333

    • Cycle Parameters

      335

    • Defining the Tool

      336

    • ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/ISO: G225)

      340

    • Cycle Run

      340

    • Please Note While Programming

      340

    • Cycle Parameters

      341

    • Allowed Engraving Characters

      343

    • Characters that Cannot be Printed

      343

    • Engraving System Variables

      344

    • Engraving the Counter Reading

      345

    • FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232)

      346

    • Cycle Run

      346

    • Please Note While Programming

      348

    • Cycle Parameters

      349

    • ASCERTAIN the LOAD (Cycle 239, DIN/ISO: G239, Software Option 143)

      351

    • Cycle Run

      351

    • Please Note While Programming

      352

    • Cycle Parameters

      352

    • Programming Examples

      353

    • Example: Interpolation Turning Cycle 291

      353

    • Example: Interpolation Turning Cycle 292

      355

    • THREAD CUTTING (Cycle 18, DIN/ISO: G18)

      357

    • Cycle Run

      357

    • Please Note While Programming

      357

    • Cycle Parameters

      358

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual (948 pages)

Brand: HEIDENHAIN
|
Category: Control Panel
|
Size: 22.95 MB

Table of Contents
  • About this Manual

    6

  • Table of Contents

    37

  • 1 First Steps with the TNC 640

    67

    • Overview

      68

    • Machine Switch-On

      68

      • Acknowledging the Power Interruption and Moving to the Reference Points

        68

    • Programming the First Part

      70

      • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

        70

      • The most Important Control Keys

        70

      • Opening a New Program/File Management

        71

      • Defining a Workpiece Blank

        72

      • Program Layout

        73

      • Programming a Simple Contour

        75

      • Creating a Cycle Program

        78

    • Graphically Testing the First Part

      81

      • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

        81

      • Selecting the Tool Table for the Test Run

        81

      • Choosing the Program You Want to Test

        82

      • Selecting the Screen Layout and the View

        82

      • Starting the Test Run

        83

    • Setting up Tools

      84

      • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

        84

      • Preparing and Measuring Tools

        84

      • The Tool Table TOOL.T

        85

      • The Pocket Table TOOL_P .TCH

        86

    • Workpiece Setup

      87

      • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

        87

      • Clamping the Workpiece

        87

      • Presetting with a 3-D Touch Probe

        88

    • Running the First Program

      89

      • Selecting the Correct Operating Mode

        89

      • Choosing the Program You Want to Run

        89

      • Starting the Program

        89

  • 2 Introduction

    91

    • The TNC 640

      92

      • HEIDENHAIN Klartext and DIN/ISO

        92

      • Compatibility

        92

    • Visual Display Unit and Operating Panel

      93

      • Display Screen

        93

      • Setting Screen Layout

        93

      • Control Panel

        94

    • Modes of Operation

      95

      • Manual Operation and El. Handwheel

        95

      • Positioning with Manual Data Input

        95

      • Programming

        96

      • Test Run

        96

      • Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block

        97

    • Status Displays

      98

      • General Status Display

        98

      • Additional Status Displays

        100

    • Window Manager

      107

      • Overview of Taskbar

        108

      • Portscan

        111

      • Remote Service

        112

      • Printer

        114

      • Selinux Security Software

        116

      • Vnc

        117

      • Backup and Restore

        119

    • Remote Desktop Manager (Option 133)

      122

      • Introduction

        122

      • Configuring Connections — Windows Terminal Service (Remotefx)

        123

      • Configuring the Connection — VNC

        125

      • Shutting down or Rebooting an External Computer

        126

      • Starting and Stopping the Connection

        127

    • Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels

      128

    • 3 D Touch Probes

      128

      • HR Electronic Handwheels

        129

  • Operating the Touchscreen

    131

    • Display Unit and Operation

      132

      • Touchscreen

        132

      • Operating Panel

        132

    • Gestures

      133

      • Overview of Possible Gestures

        133

      • Navigating in the Table and NC Programs

        134

      • Operating the Simulation

        135

      • Using the HEROS Menu

        136

      • Operating the CAD Viewer

        137

    • Functions in the Taskbar

      142

      • Touchscreen Calibration

        142

      • Touchscreen Configuration

        142

      • Touchscreen Cleaning

        143

Advertisement

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Operating Instructions Manual

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Operating Instructions Manual (64 pages)

Programming Station

Brand: HEIDENHAIN
|
Category: Controller
|
Size: 3.19 MB

Table of Contents
  • Table of Contents

    7

  • 1 Important Information on the Software for the Programming Station

    9

    • 1.1 Introduction

      10

      • General Information

        10

      • Options/Feature Content Level (FCL)

        10

    • 1.2 Compatibility

      11

      • Downward Compatibility

        12

      • Differences in Fixed Cycles

        13

      • Differences in Touch Probe Cycles

        19

      • Differences in Miscellaneous Functions M

        27

      • Differences in Q-Parameter Programming

        31

      • Differences in Other Functions

        33

    • Working with the Programming Station

      36

      • Starting the Programming Station

        36

      • Showing the Virtual Keyboard

        37

      • Exiting the Programming Station

        37

    • Data Transfer from the Programming Station to the Machine Tool

      39

      • Prerequisites

        39

      • Preparations at the Programming Station

        39

      • Calling a Program from the Machine Tool

        40

      • Connection between the Programming Station and HEIDENHAIN PC Software

        40

    • Special Features of the Demo Version

      41

      • General Information

        41

      • Starting the Demo Version

        41

      • Keyboard Assignment

        42

      • Overview of Keyboard Assignment

        46

      • Key Assignment on Portable Computers

        47

  • 2 Items Supplied / Installation

    49

    • Items Supplied / System Requirements

      50

      • Items Supplied

        50

      • System Requirements

        51

    • Connecting the Programming Station

      52

      • Connecting the Keyboard for the Programming Station

        52

      • Mounting the Cable Clamps for the USB Cable

        52

      • Number Stickers

        53

      • Connecting the USB Dongle (for the Version with a Virtual Keyboard)

        53

      • Connecting the USB Network Dongle (Only for the Version with a Virtual Keyboard)

        53

      • Installing the Programming Station Software

        54

      • Configuring the Programming Station Software for Use with a USB Network Dongle

        55

      • Network License for Multiple Workstations

        56

      • Setting the Conversational Language

        58

      • Working with the HEIDENHAIN Basic PLC Program

        60

      • Working with a Machine-Specific PLC Program

        61

      • Displaying Additional Drives

        61

Advertisement

Related Products

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Programming Station

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 E

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 E

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Programming Station

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 155 B

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 151 F

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 151 W

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 370

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 PB/M

  • HEIDENHAIN TNC 430 PA/M

HEIDENHAIN Categories

Media Converter

Measuring Instruments

Control Systems

Industrial Equipment

Control Unit

More HEIDENHAIN Manuals

Loading…

HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 User Manual

User’s Manual

HEIDENHAIN

Conversational

TNC 640

NC Software 340 590-01 340 591-01 340 594-01

English (en) 4/2012

Controls of the TNC

Keys on visual display unit

Key

Function

Split screen layout

Toggle the display between machining and programming modes

Soft keys for selecting functions on screen

Switch the soft-key rows

Alphanumeric keyboard

Key Function

File names, comments

DIN/ISO programming

Machine operating modes

Key

Function

Manual Operation

Electronic Handwheel

Positioning with Manual Data Input

Program Run, Single Block

Program Run, Full Sequence

Programming modes

Key

Function

Programming and Editing

Test Run

Program/file management, TNC functions

Key

Function

Select or delete programs and files,

external data transfer

Define program call, select datum and

point tables

Select MOD functions

Display help text for NC error messages,

call TNCguide

Display all current error messages

Show calculator

Navigation keys

Key

Function

Move highlight

Go directly to blocks, cycles and

parameter functions

Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed

Feed rate

Spindle speed

100

100

50

150

50

150

0

F %

0

S %

Cycles, subprograms and program section repeats Key Function

Define touch probe cycles

Define and call cycles

Enter and call labels for subprogramming and program section repeats

Enter program stop in a program

Tool functions

Key Function

Define tool data in the program

Call tool data

Programming path movements

Key Function

Approach/depart contour

FK free contour programming

Straight line

Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

Circle with center

Circle with radius

Circular arc with tangential connection

Chamfer/Corner rounding

Special functions

Key Function

Show special functions

Select the next tab in forms

Up/down one dialog box or button

Coordinate axes and numbers: Entering and editing

Key

Function

. . .

Select coordinate axes or

enter them into the program

. . .

Numbers

Decimal point / Reverse algebraic sign

Polar coordinate input / Incremental values

Q parameter programming /

Q parameter status

Save actual position or values from calculator

Skip dialog questions, delete words

Confirm entry and resume dialog

Conclude block and exit entry

Clear numerical entry or TNC error message

Abort dialog, delete program section

About this Manual

The symbols used in this manual are described below.

This symbol indicates that important notes about the function described must be regarded.

This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the following risks when using the described function:

Danger to workpiece

Danger to fixtures

Danger to tool

Danger to machine

Danger to operator

This symbol indicates that the described function must be adapted by the machine tool builder. The function described may therefore vary depending on the machine.

This symbol indicates that you can find detailed information about a function in another manual.

Would you like any changes, or have you found any errors?

We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you. Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de.

About this Manual

TNC Model, Software and Features

TNC Model, Software and Features

This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers.

TNC model

NC software number

TNC 640

340 590-01

TNC 640 E

340 591-01

TNC 640 Programming Station

340 594-01

The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC. The export version of the TNC has the following limitations:

Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes

The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters. Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool.

TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include:

Tool measurement with the TT

Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine.

Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users.

User’s Manual for Cycle Programming:

All of the cycle functions (touch probe cycles and fixed cycles) are described in a separate manual. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you need a copy of this User’s Manual. ID: 892 905-xx

6

Software options

The TNC 640 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions:

Software option 1 (option number #08)

Cylinder surface interpolation (Cycles 27, 28 and 29)

Feed rate in mm/min for rotary axes: M116

Tilting the machining plane (plane functions, Cycle 19 and 3D-ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode)

Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane

Software option 2 (option number #09)

5-axis interpolation

3-D machining:

M128: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM)

FUNCTION TCPM: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM) in selectable modes

M144: Compensating the machine’s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block

LN blocks (3-D compensation)

HEIDENHAIN DNC (option number #18)

Communication with external PC applications over COM component

Additional conversational language (option number #41)

Function for enabling the conversational languages Slovenian, Slovak, Norwegian, Latvian, Estonian, Korean, Turkish, Romanian, Lithuanian.

Display step (option number #23)

Input resolution and display step:

Linear axes down to 0.01 µm

Rotary axes to 0.00001°

Double speed (option number #49)

Double-speed control loops are used primarily for high-speed spindles as well as for linear motors and torque motors

TNC Model, Software and Features

TNC Model, Software and Features

KinematicsOpt software option (option number #48)

Touch-probe cycles for inspecting and optimizing the machine accuracy

Software option Mill-Turning (option number #50)

Functions for milling/turning mode:

Switching between Milling/Turning mode of operation

Constant cutting speed

Tool-tip radius compensation

Turning cycles

Extended Tool Management software option

(option number #93)

Tool management that can be changed by the machine manufacturer using Python scripts

8

Feature content level (upgrade functions)

Along with software options, significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level (FCL) upgrade functions. Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC.

All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine.

Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n, where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level.

You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions. For more information, contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN.

Intended place of operation

The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for use primarily in industrially-zoned areas.

Legal information

This product uses open source software. Further information is available on the control under

UProgramming and Editing operating mode

UMOD function

ULICENSE INFO soft key

TNC Model, Software and Features

TNC Model, Software and Features

10

Contents

First

Steps with the TNC 640

1

2

Introduction

Programming: Fundamentals,

3

File Management

Programming: Programming Aids

4

5

Programming: Tools

6

Programming: Programming Contours

7

Programming: Subprograms and

Program Section Repeats

8

Programming: Q Parameters

9

Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

10

Programming: Special Functions

11

Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

12

Programming: Pallet Editor

13

Programming: Turning Operations

14

Manual Operation and Setup

15

Positioning with Manual Data Input

16

Test Run and Program Run

17

MOD Functions

18

Tables and Overviews

1 First Steps with the TNC 640 ….. 35

1.1

Overview …..

36

1.2

Machine Switch-On

….. 37

Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference points …..

37

1.3

Programming the First Part …..

38

Selecting the correct operating mode …..

38

The most important TNC keys …..

38

Creating a new program/file management …..

39

Defining a workpiece blank …..

40

Program layout …..

41

Programming a simple contour …..

42

Creating a cycle program

….. 45

1.4

Graphically Testing the First Program

….. 48

Selecting the correct operating mode …..

48

Selecting the tool table for the test run …..

48

Choosing the program you want to test …..

49

Selecting the screen layout and the view …..

49

Starting the program test

….. 49

1.5

Tool Setup …..

50

Selecting the correct operating mode …..

50

Preparing and measuring tools …..

50

The tool table TOOL.T …..

50

The pocket table TOOL_P.TCH

…..

51

1.6

Workpiece Setup …..

52

Selecting the correct operating mode …..

52

Clamping the workpiece …..

52

Aligning the workpiece with a 3-D touch probe system …..

53

Datum setting with a 3-D touch probe …..

54

1.7

Running the First Program …..

55

Selecting the correct operating mode …..

55

Choosing the program you want to run …..

55

Starting the program …..

55

…..2 Introduction

57

2.1 The TNC 640

….. 58

Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats …..

58

Compatibility …..

58

2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard …..

59

Visual display unit …..

59

Setting the screen layout …..

60

Operating panel

….. 61

2.3 Operating Modes …..

62

Manual Operation and El. Handwheel

….. 62

Positioning with Manual Data Input …..

62

Programming and Editing …..

63

Test Run …..

63

Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block …..

64

2.4 Status Displays …..

65

«General» status display …..

65

Additional status displays …..

67

2.5 Window Manager …..

74

Soft-key row …..

75

2.6 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels …..

76

3-D touch probes …..

76

HR electronic handwheels …..

77

14

…..3 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

79

3.1 Fundamentals …..

80

Position encoders and reference marks

…..

80

Reference system …..

80

Reference system on milling machines

…..

81

Designation of the axes on milling machines …..

81

Polar coordinates …..

82

Absolute and incremental workpiece positions …..

83

Setting the datum …..

84

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs …..

85

Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational …..

85

Define the blank: BLK FORM …..

85

Creating a new part program

…..

86

Programming tool movements in conversational format

….. 88

Actual position capture …..

90

Editing a program …..

91

The TNC search function …..

95

3.3 File Management: Fundamentals …..

97

Files …..

97

Showing externally created files on the TNC …..

99

Data backup …..

99

3.4 Working with the File Manager …..

100

Directories …..

100

Paths …..

100

Overview: Functions of the file manager …..

101

Calling the file manager

….. 102

Selecting drives, directories and files …..

103

Creating a new directory …..

105

Creating a new file …..

105

Copying a single file …..

106

Copying files into another directory …..

107

Copying a table …..

108

Copying a directory

…..

108

Choosing one of the last files selected …..

109

Deleting a file …..

109

Deleting a directory

…..

110

Marking files …..

111

Renaming a file …..

112

File sorting …..

112

Additional functions

…..

113

Additional tools for management of external file types …..

114

Data transfer to or from an external data medium …..

119

The TNC in a network …..

121

USB devices on the TNC …..

122

…..4 Programming: Programming Aids

123

4.1 Adding Comments

….. 124

Application …..

124

Entering comments during programming

….. 124

Inserting comments after program entry …..

124

Entering a comment in a separate block …..

124

Functions for editing of the comment …..

125

4.2 Display of NC Programs

….. 126

Syntax highlighting …..

126

Scrollbar …..

126

4.3 Structuring Programs …..

127

Definition and applications …..

127

Displaying the program structure window / Changing the active window …..

127

Inserting a structuring block in the (left) program window …..

127

Selecting blocks in the program structure window …..

127

4.4 On-Line Calculator

….. 128

Operation …..

128

4.5 Programming Graphics …..

130

Generating / not generating graphics during programming …..

130

Generating a graphic for an existing program …..

130

Block number display ON/OFF …..

131

Erasing the graphic …..

131

Showing grid lines …..

131

Magnifying or reducing a detail …..

131

4.6 Error Messages

…..

132

Display of errors …..

132

Open the error window …..

132

Closing the error window …..

132

Detailed error messages …..

133

INTERNAL INFO soft key …..

133

Clearing errors …..

134

Error log …..

134

Keystroke log …..

135

Informational texts …..

136

Saving service files …..

136

Calling the TNCguide help system …..

136

4.7 Context-Sensitive Help System

….. 137

Application …..

137

Working with the TNCguide

….. 138

Downloading current help files …..

142

16

5 Programming: Tools

….. 145

5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data …..

146

Feed rate F …..

146

Spindle speed S

….. 147

5.2 Tool Data …..

148

Requirements for tool compensation

….. 148

Tool numbers and tool names

….. 148

Tool length L …..

148

Tool radius R …..

148

Delta values for lengths and radii …..

149

Entering tool data into the program …..

149

Entering tool data in the table

….. 150

Pocket table for tool changer …..

157

Calling tool data

….. 160

Tool change …..

161

Tool management (software option) …..

166

5.3 Tool Compensation

….. 173

Introduction …..

173

Tool length compensation …..

173

Tool radius compensation …..

174

6 Programming: Programming Contours

…..

177

6.1 Tool Movements

…..

178

Path functions …..

178

FK free contour programming …..

178

Miscellaneous functions M …..

178

Subprograms and program section repeats …..

178

Programming with Q parameters

….. 178

6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions …..

179

Programming tool movements for workpiece machining …..

179

6.3 Contour Approach and Departure …..

183

Overview: Types of paths for contour approach and departure …..

183

Important positions for approach and departure

….. 184

Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection: APPR LT …..

186

Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point: APPR LN ….. 186

Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection: APPR CT …..

187

Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour: APPR LCT …..

188

Departing on a straight line with tangential connection: DEP LT …..

189

Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point: DEP LN …..

189

Departing on a circular path with tangential connection: DEP CT …..

190

Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line: DEP LCT …..

190

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates …..

191

Overview of path functions …..

191

Straight line L

…..

192

Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines

….. 193

Corner rounding RND …..

194

Circle center CCI …..

195

Circular path C around circle center CC …..

196

Circular path CR with defined radius …..

197

Circular path CT with tangential connection …..

199

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates

…..

204

Overview …..

204

Zero point for polar coordinates: pole CC …..

205

Straight line LP …..

205

Circular path CP around pole CC …..

206

Circular path CTP with tangential connection

…..

207

Helical interpolation …..

208

18

6.6 Path Contours—FK Free Contour Programming …..

212

Fundamentals …..

212

Graphics during FK programming …..

214

Initiating the FK dialog …..

215

Pole for FK programming …..

216

Free programming of straight lines …..

216

Free programming of circular arcs …..

217

Input possibilities

….. 218

Auxiliary points …..

222

Relative data …..

223

7 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats …..

231

7.1

Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats …..

232

Labels

….. 232

7.2

Subprograms …..

233

Operating sequence …..

233

Programming notes …..

233

Programming a subprogram …..

233

Calling a subprogram

…..

233

7.3

Program Section Repeats …..

234

Label LBL …..

234

Operating sequence …..

234

Programming notes …..

234

Programming a program section repeat

….. 234

Calling a program section repeat …..

234

7.4

Separate Program as Subprogram …..

235

Operating sequence …..

235

Programming notes …..

235

Calling any program as a subprogram …..

236

7.5

Nesting …..

237

Types of nesting …..

237

Nesting depth

….. 237

Subprogram within a subprogram …..

238

Repeating program section repeats …..

239

Repeating a subprogram …..

240

7.6

Programming Examples

…..

241

20

…..8 Programming: Q Parameters

247

8.1

Principle and Overview …..

248

Programming notes …..

249

Calling Q-parameter functions

…..

250

8.2

Part Families—Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values …..

251

Application …..

251

8.3

Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations

…..

252

Application …..

252

Overview …..

252

Programming fundamental operations

…..

253

8.4

Trigonometric Functions

….. 254

Definitions …..

254

Programming trigonometric functions

…..

255

8.5

Circle Calculations

….. 256

Application …..

256

8.6

If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters …..

257

Application …..

257

Unconditional jumps …..

257

Programming If-Then decisions

….. 257

Abbreviations used: …..

258

8.7

Checking and Changing Q Parameters …..

259

Procedure …..

259

8.8

Additional Functions …..

261

Overview …..

261

FN 14: ERROR: Displaying error messages …..

262

FN 16: F-PRINT: Formatted output of text and Q-parameter values …..

267

FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ …..

271

FN 19: PLC: Transfer values to the PLC …..

280

FN 20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC synchronization …..

280

FN 29: PLC: Transfer values to the PLC …..

282

FN37: EXPORT

….. 283

8.9

Accessing Tables with SQL Commands …..

284

Introduction …..

284

A Transaction

…..

285

Programming SQL commands

…..

287

Overview of the soft keys …..

287

SQL BIND …..

288

SQL SELECT …..

289

SQL FETCH …..

292

SQL UPDATE

…..

293

SQL INSERT …..

293

SQL COMMIT …..

294

SQL ROLLBACK …..

294

8.10 Entering Formulas Directly

….. 295

Entering formulas …..

295

Rules for formulas …..

297

Programming example …..

298

8.11 String Parameters …..

299

String processing functions …..

299

Assigning string parameters …..

300

Chain-linking string parameters

….. 301

Converting a numerical value to a string parameter …..

302

Copying a substring from a string parameter …..

303

Converting a string parameter to a numerical value …..

304

Checking a string parameter …..

305

Finding the length of a string parameter

….. 306

Comparing alphabetic priority

…..

307

Reading machine parameters

…..

308

8.12 Preassigned Q Parameters …..

311

Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107 …..

311

Active tool radius: Q108 …..

311

Tool axis: Q109 …..

312

Spindle status: Q110 …..

312

Coolant on/off: Q111 …..

312

Overlap factor: Q112 …..

312

Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program: Q113 …..

313

Tool length: Q114 …..

313

Coordinates after probing during program run …..

313

Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 …..

314

Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC

….. 314

Measurement results from touch probe cycles (see also User’s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles) …..

315

8.13 Programming Examples

….. 317

22

…..9 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

325

9.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP …..

326

Fundamentals …..

326

9.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant

….. 327

Overview …..

327

9.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data …..

328

Programming machine-referenced coordinates: M91/M92 …..

328

Moving to positions in a non-tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane: M130 …..

330

9.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior

….. 331

Machining small contour steps: M97 …..

331

Machining open contour corners: M98 …..

333

Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103 …..

334

Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution: M136 …..

335

Feed rate for circular arcs: M109/M110/M111

….. 336

Calculating the radius-compensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120 …..

337

Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run: M118 …..

339

Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140 …..

340

Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141 …..

341

Delete basic rotation: M143 …..

341

Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148 …..

342

…..10 Programming: Special Functions

343

10.1 Overview of Special Functions …..

344

Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions …..

344

Program defaults menu …..

345

Functions for contour and point machining menu …..

345

Menu of various conversational functions …..

346

10.2 Working with the Parallel Axes U, V and W …..

347

Overview …..

347

FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY ….. 348

FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE …..

349

FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF …..

350

FUNCTION PARAXMODE …..

351

FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF …..

352

10.3 File Functions …..

353

Application …..

353

Defining file functions …..

353

10.4 Defining Coordinate Transformations

….. 354

Overview …..

354

TRANS DATUM AXIS …..

354

TRANS DATUM TABLE …..

355

TRANS DATUM RESET …..

355

10.5 Creating Text Files …..

356

Application …..

356

Opening and exiting text files …..

356

Editing texts …..

357

Deleting and re-inserting characters, words and lines

….. 358

Editing text blocks …..

359

Finding text sections

…..

360

24

11 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

…..

361

11.1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining

….. 362

11.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) …..

363

Introduction

….. 363

Define the PLANE function …..

365

Position display …..

365

Reset the PLANE function …..

366

Defining the machining plane with spatial angles: PLANE SPATIAL

….. 367

Defining the machining plane with projection angles: PROJECTED PLANE

…..

369

Defining the machining plane with Euler angles: EULER PLANE …..

371

Defining the working plane with two vectors: VECTOR PLANE …..

373

Defining the working plane via three points: PLANE POINTS

….. 375

Defining the machining plane with a single, incremental spatial angle: PLANE RELATIVE …..

377

Tilting the working plane through axis angle: PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function) …..

378

Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function …..

380

11.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in a Tilted Plane (Software Option 2) …..

385

Function …..

385

Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis …..

385

Inclined-tool machining via normal vectors …..

386

11.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes …..

387

Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C: M116 (software option 1) …..

387

Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126 …..

388

Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360°: M94 …..

389

Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128 (software option

2) …..

390

Selecting tilting axes: M138

….. 392

Compensating the machine’s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block: M144

(software option 2)

….. 393

11.5 TCPM FUNCTION (Software Option 2)

….. 394

Function …..

394

Defining the TCPM FUNCTION …..

395

Mode of action of the programmed feed rate

….. 395

Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis coordinates …..

396

Type of interpolation between the starting and end position …..

397

Resetting the TCPM FUNCTION …..

398

11.6 Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option 2) …..

399

Introduction …..

399

Definition of a normalized vector …..

400

Permissible tool shapes …..

401

Using other tools: Delta values …..

401

3-D compensation without TCPM …..

402

Face milling: 3-D compensation with TCPM …..

402

Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation with TCPM and radius compensation (RL/RR) …..

404

12 Programming: Pallet Editor …..

407

12.1 Pallet Editor …..

408

Application …..

408

Selecting a pallet table …..

410

Exiting the pallet file …..

410

Executing the pallet file …..

411

26

13 Programming: Turning Operations

…..

413

13.1 Turning Operations on Milling Machines (Software Option 50) …..

414

Introduction

….. 414

13.2 Basis Functions (Software Option 50) …..

415

Switching between milling/turning mode of operation …..

415

Graphical display of turning operations …..

417

Programming the speed …..

418

Feed rate …..

419

Tool call …..

420

Tool compensation in the program …..

420

Tool data …..

421

Tool tip radius compensation TRC …..

423

Recessing and undercutting

….. 424

Inclined turning …..

431

13.3 Unbalance Functions

….. 433

Unbalance while turning …..

433

Measure Unbalance cycle …..

435

14 Manual Operation and Setup

…..

437

14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off …..

438

Switch-on …..

438

Switch-off …..

440

14.2 Moving the Machine Axes

….. 441

Note …..

441

Moving the axis using the machine axis direction buttons …..

441

Incremental jog positioning …..

442

Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel …..

443

14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M

…..

444

Application …..

444

Entering values …..

444

Changing the spindle speed and feed rate

….. 445

Activating feed-rate limitation

…..

446

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe

…..

447

Note …..

447

Preparation …..

447

Workpiece presetting with axis keys …..

448

Datum management with the preset table …..

449

14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe …..

455

Overview …..

455

Selecting touch probe cycles

…..

455

Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables …..

456

Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table …..

456

14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe …..

457

Introduction …..

457

Calibrating the effective length

….. 458

Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment …..

459

Displaying calibration values …..

460

14.7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe …..

461

Introduction …..

461

Measuring a basic rotation …..

462

Saving a basic rotation in the preset table …..

462

Displaying a basic rotation …..

462

Canceling a basic rotation …..

462

28

14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe

….. 463

Overview …..

463

Datum setting in any axis

….. 463

Corner as datum ….. 464

Circle center as datum …..

465

Measuring workpieces with a 3-D touch probe …..

466

Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges …..

469

14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) …..

470

Application, function …..

470

Traversing reference points in tilted axes …..

472

Position display in a tilted system …..

472

Limitations on working with the tilting function

….. 472

Activating manual tilting …..

473

Setting the current tool-axis direction as the active machining direction …..

474

Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system …..

475

15 Positioning with Manual Data Input …..

477

15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations ….. 478

Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

….. 478

Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI …..

481

30

16 Test Run and Program Run

…..

483

16.1

Graphics …..

484

Application

….. 484

Setting the speed of the test run

….. 485

Overview of display modes …..

486

Plan view …..

486

Projection in 3 planes …..

487

3-D view …..

488

Magnifying details …..

490

Repeating graphic simulation …..

491

Displaying the tool …..

491

Measuring the machining time …..

492

3-D line graphics …..

493

16.2

Showing the Blank in the Working Space …..

495

Application

….. 495

16.3

Functions for Program Display …..

496

Overview …..

496

16.4

Test Run …..

497

Application

….. 497

16.5

Program run …..

499

Application

….. 499

Running a part program …..

500

Interrupting machining …..

501

Moving the machine axes during an interruption

….. 502

Resuming program run after an interruption …..

503

Mid-program startup (block scan)

….. 504

Returning to the contour …..

506

16.6

Automatic Program Start …..

507

Application

….. 507

16.7

Optional block skip …..

508

Application

….. 508

Inserting the «/» character …..

508

Erasing the «/» character …..

508

16.8

Optional Program-Run Interruption …..

509

Application

….. 509

…..17 MOD Functions

511

17.1

Selecting MOD Functions

….. 512

Selecting the MOD functions

…..

512

Changing the settings …..

512

Exiting the MOD functions …..

512

Overview of MOD functions …..

513

17.2

Software Numbers

….. 514

Application …..

514

17.3

Entering Code Numbers …..

515

Application …..

515

17.4

Setting the Data Interfaces …..

516

Serial interfaces on the TNC 640

….. 516

Application …..

516

Setting the RS-232 interface …..

516

Setting the baud rate (baudRate)

….. 516

Setting the protocol (protocol) …..

516

Setting the data bits (dataBits) …..

517

Parity check (parity) …..

517

Setting the stop bits (stopBits) …..

517

Setting the handshake (flowControl) …..

517

Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software …..

518

Setting the operating mode of the external device (fileSystem)

….. 518

Software for data transfer …..

519

17.5

Ethernet Interface

….. 521

Introduction …..

521

Connection possibilities

….. 521

Configuring the TNC …..

522

17.6

Position Display Types …..

528

Application …..

528

17.7

Unit of Measurement …..

529

Application …..

529

17.8

Displaying Operating Times …..

530

Application …..

530

32

…..18 Tables and Overviews

531

18.1

Machine-Specific User Parameters …..

532

Application …..

532

18.2

Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces …..

540

RS-232-C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices …..

540

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices …..

541

Ethernet interface RJ45 socket

….. 541

18.3

Technical Information …..

542

18.4

Exchanging the Buffer Battery …..

549

34

First Steps with the TNC 640

1.1 Overview

This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures. For more information on a respective topic, see the section referred to in the text.

The following topics are included in this chapter:

Machine Switch-On

Programming the First Part

Graphically Testing the First Program

Tool Setup

Workpiece Setup

Running the First Program

36

First Steps with the TNC 640

1.2 Machine Switch-On

Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference points

Switch-on and crossing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool. Your machine manual provides more detailed information.

USwitch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC starts the operating system. This process may take several minutes. Then the TNC will display the message «Power interruption.»

U Press the CE key: The TNC compiles the PLC program

USwitch on the control voltage: The TNC checks operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into the reference run mode

UCross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence: For each axis press the machine START button. If you have absolute linear and angle encoders on your machine there is no need for a reference run

The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.

Further information on this topic

Traversing the reference marks: See «Switch-on» on page 438

Operating modes: See «Programming and Editing» on page 63

1.2 Machine Switch-On

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.3 Programming the First Part

Selecting the correct operating mode

You can write programs only in the Programming and Editing mode:

UPress the operating modes key: The TNC goes into the Programming and Editing mode

Further information on this topic

Operating modes: See «Programming and Editing» on page 63

The most important TNC keys

Functions for conversational guidance

Key

Confirm entry and activate the next dialog prompt

Ignore the dialog question

End the dialog immediately

Abort dialog, discard entries

Soft keys on the screen with which you select functions appropriate to the active state

Further information on this topic

Writing and editing programs: See «Editing a program» on page 91

Overview of keys: See «Controls of the TNC» on page 2

38

First Steps with the TNC 640

Creating a new program/file management

U Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file management. The file management of the TNC is arranged much like the file management on a PC with the Windows Explorer. The file management enables you to manipulate data on the TNC hard disk

UUse the arrow keys to select the folder in which you want to open the new file

UEnter a file name with the extension .H: The TNC then automatically opens a program and asks for the unit of measure for the new program

UTo select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH soft key: The TNC automatically starts the workpiece blank definition (see «Defining a workpiece blank» on page 40)

The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program. Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks.

Further information on this topic

File management: See «Working with the File Manager» on page 100

Creating a new program: See «Creating and Writing Programs» on page 85

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.3 Programming the First Part

Defining a workpiece blank

Immediately after you have created a new program, the TNC starts the dialog for entering the workpiece blank definition. Always define the workpiece blank as a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points, each with reference to the selected reference point.

After you have created a new program, the TNC automatically initiates the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data:

UWorking plane in graphic: XY?: Enter the active spindle axis. Z is saved as default setting. Accept with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Minimum X: Enter the smallest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Minimum Y: Enter the smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Minimum Z: Enter the smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. –40. Confirm with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Maximum X: Enter the largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 100. Confirm with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Maximum Y: Enter the largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 100. Confirm with the ENT key

UWorkpiece blank def.: Maximum Z: Enter the largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key. The TNC concludes the dialog

Example NC blocks

0

BEGIN PGM NEW MM

1

BLK

FORM

0.1

Z X+0

Y+0 Z-40

2

BLK

FORM

0.2

X+100

Y+100 Z+0

3

END

PGM

NEW

MM

Further information on this topic

Defining the workpiece blank: (see page 86)

40

First Steps with the TNC 640

Program layout

NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This makes it easier to find your place, accelerates programming and reduces errors.

Recommended program layout for simple, conventional contour machining

1Call tool, define tool axis

2Retract the tool

3Pre-position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting point

4In the tool axis, position the tool above the workpiece, or pre-position immediately to workpiece depth. If required, switch on the spindle/coolant

5Move to the contour

6Machine the contour

7Leave the contour

8Retract the tool, end the program

Further information on this topic:

Contour programming: See «Tool Movements» on page 178

Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs

1Call tool, define tool axis

2Retract the tool

3Define the machining positions

4Define the fixed cycle

5Call the cycle, switch on the spindle/coolant

6Retract the tool, end the program

Further information on this topic:

Cycle programming: See User’s Manual for Cycles

Example: Layout of contour machining programs

0 BEGIN PGM BSPCONT MM

1BLK FORM 0.1 Z X… Y… Z…

2BLK FORM 0.2 X… Y… Z…

3TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000

4L Z+250 R0 FMAX

5L X… Y… R0 FMAX

6L Z+10 R0 F3000 M13

7APPR … RL F500

16DEP … X… Y… F3000 M9

17L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2

18END PGM BSPCONT MM

Example: Program layout for cycle programming

0 BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM

1BLK FORM 0.1 Z X… Y… Z…

2BLK FORM 0.2 X… Y… Z…

3TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000

4L Z+250 R0 FMAX

5PATTERN DEF POS1( X… Y… Z… ) …

6CYCL DEF…

7CYCL CALL PAT FMAX M13

8L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2

9END PGM BSBCYC MM

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.3 Programming the First Part

Programming a simple contour

The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm. You have already defined the workpiece blank. After you have initiated a dialog through a function key, enter all the data requested by the TNC in the screen header.

U Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis

U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

UConfirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX)

Y

10

95

3

2

10

1

4

20

5

20

X

5

9

UConfirm the Miscellaneous function M? with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

UPreposition the tool in the working plane: Press the orange X axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. –20

UPress the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. –20. Confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

UConfirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX)

UConfirm the Miscellaneous function M? with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

UMove the tool to workpiece depth: Press the orange axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. –5. Confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

UFeed rate F=? Enter the positioning feed rate, e.g. 3000 mm/min and confirm with the ENT key

UMiscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and coolant, e.g. M13. Confirm with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

42

First Steps with the TNC 640

UMove to the contour: Press the APPR/DEP key: The TNC shows a soft-key row with approach and departure functions

USelect the approach function APPR CT: Enter the coordinates of the contour starting point 1 in X and Y, e.g. 5/5. Confirm with the ENT key

UCenter angle? Enter the approach angle, e.g. 90°, and confirm with the ENT key

UCircle radius? Enter the approach radius, e.g. 8 mm, and confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm the Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? with the RL soft key: Activate the radius compensation to the left of the programmed contour

UFeed rate F=? Enter the machining feed rate, e.g. 700 mm/min, and confirm your entry with the END key

UMachine the contour and move to contour point 2: You only need to enter the information that changes. In other words, enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key

UMove to contour point 3: Enter the X coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key

UDefine the chamfer at contour point 3: Enter the chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key

UMove to contour point 4: Enter the Y coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key

UDefine the chamfer at contour point 4: Enter the chamfer width 20 mm and save with the END key

UMove to contour point 1: Enter the X coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.3 Programming the First Part

U Depart the contour

USelect the departure function DEP CT

UCenter angle? Enter the departure angle, e.g. 90°, and confirm with the ENT key

UCircle radius? Enter the departure radius, e.g. 8 mm, and confirm with the ENT key

UFeed rate F=? Enter the positioning feed rate, e.g. 3000 mm/min and save it with the ENT key

UMiscellaneous function M? Switch off the coolant, e.g. M9, with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

UConfirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX)

UMiscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

Further information on this topic

Complete example with NC blocks: See «Example: Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates» on page 200

Creating a new program: See «Creating and Writing Programs» on page 85

Approaching/departing contours: See «Contour Approach and Departure» on page 183

Programming contours: See «Overview of path functions» on page 191

Programmable feed rates: See «Possible feed rate input» on page 89

Tool radius compensation: See «Tool radius compensation» on page 174

Miscellaneous functions (M): See «Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant» on page 327

44

First Steps with the TNC 640

Creating a cycle program

The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece blank.

U Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis

U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the ENT key

UConfirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

UConfirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX)

UConfirm the Miscellaneous function M? with the END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block

U Call the cycle menu

U Display the drilling cycles

USelect the standard drilling cycle 200: The TNC starts the dialog for cycle definition. Enter all parameters requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each entry with the ENT key. In the screen to the right, the TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective cycle parameter

Y

100

90

10

10 20

X

80 90 100

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.3 Programming the First Part

U Call the menu for special functions

U Display the functions for point machining

U Select the pattern definition

USelect point entry: Enter the coordinates of the 4 points and confirm each with the ENT key. After entering the fourth point, save the block with the END key

U Display the menu for defining the cycle call

U Run the drilling cycle on the defined pattern:

U Confirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at

rapid traverse (FMAX)

U Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and

coolant, e.g. M13. Confirm with the END key: The TNC

saves the entered positioning block

U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order

to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the

position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the

ENT key

U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing

the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation

U Confirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at

rapid traverse (FMAX)

U Miscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end the

program and confirm with the END key: The TNC

saves the entered positioning block

Example NC blocks

0

BEGIN PGM C200 MM

1

BLK

FORM

0.1

Z X+0

Y+0 Z-40

Definition of workpiece blank

2

BLK

FORM

0.2

X+100

Y+100 Z+0

3

TOOL CALL 5 Z

S4500

Tool call

4

L Z+250

R0 FMAX

Retract the tool

5

PATTERN

DEF

Define machining positions

POS1

(X+10

Y+10

Z+0)

POS2

(X+10

Y+90

Z+0)

POS3

(X+90

Y+90

Z+0)

POS4

(X+90

Y+10

Z+0)

46

First Steps with the TNC 640

6

CYCL DEF 200

DRILLING

Define the cycle

Q200=2

;SET-UP CLEARANCE

Q201=–20

;DEPTH

Q206=250

;FEED

RATE

FOR

PLNGNG

Q202=5

;PLUNGING

DEPTH

Q210=0

;DWELL

TIME AT

TOP

Q203=-10

;SURFACE COORDINATE

Q204=20

;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE

Q211=0.2

;DWELL

TIME AT

DEPTH

7

CYCL CALL PAT

FMAX M13

Spindle and coolant on, call the cycle

8

L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2

Retract in the tool axis, end program

9

END PGM C200

MM

Further information on this topic

Creating a new program: See «Creating and Writing Programs» on page 85

Cycle programming: See User’s Manual for Cycles

1.3 Programming the First Part

1.4 Graphically Testing the First Program

1.4Graphically Testing the First Program

Selecting the correct operating mode

You can test programs only in the Test Run mode:

UPress the operating modes key: The TNC goes into the Test Run mode

Further information on this topic

Operating modes of the TNC: See «Operating Modes» on page 62

Testing programs: See «Test Run» on page 497

Selecting the tool table for the test run

You only need to execute this step if you have not activated a tool table in the Test Run mode.

U Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file manager

UPress the SELECT TYPE soft key: The TNC shows a soft-key menu for selection of the file type to be displayed

UPress the SHOW ALL soft key: The TNC shows all saved files in the right window

U Move the highlight to the left onto the directories

U Move the highlight to the TNC: directory

U Move the highlight to the right onto the files

U Move the highlight to the file TOOL.T (active tool table) and load with the ENT key: TOOL.T receives the status S and is therefore active for the Test Run

U Press the END key: Leave the file manager

Further information on this topic

Tool management: See «Entering tool data in the table» on page 150

Testing programs: See «Test Run» on page 497

48

First Steps with the TNC 640

Choosing the program you want to test

U Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file manager

UPress the LAST FILES soft key: The TNC opens a pop-up window with the most recently selected files

UUse the arrow keys to select the program that you want to test. Load with the ENT key

Further information on this topic

Selecting a program: See «Working with the File Manager» on page 100

Selecting the screen layout and the view

U Press the key for selecting the screen layout. The TNC shows all available alternatives in the soft-key row

UPress the PROGRAM + GRAPHICS soft key: In the left half of the screen the TNC shows the program; in the right half it shows the workpiece blank

USelect the desired view via soft key

U Plan view

U Projection in three planes

U 3-D view

Further information on this topic

Graphic functions: See «Graphics» on page 484

Running a test run: See «Test Run» on page 497

Starting the program test

UPress the RESET + START soft key: The TNC simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end

UWhile the simulation is running, you can use the soft keys to change views.

UPress the STOP soft key: The TNC interrupts the test run

UPress the START soft key: The TNC resumes the test run after a break

Further information on this topic

Running a test run: See «Test Run» on page 497

Graphic functions: See «Graphics» on page 484

Adjusting the test speed: See «Setting the speed of the test run» on page 485

1.4 Graphically Testing the First Program

1.5 Tool Setup

Selecting the correct operating mode

Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode:

UPress the operating modes key: The TNC goes into the Manual Operation mode

Further information on this topic

Operating modes of the TNC: See «Operating Modes» on page 62

Preparing and measuring tools

UClamp the required tools in their chucks

UWhen measuring with an external tool presetter: Measure the tools, note down the length and radius, or transfer them directly to the machine through a transfer program

UWhen measuring on the machine: Place the tools into the tool changer (see page 51)

The tool table TOOL.T

In the tool table TOOL.T (permanently saved under TNC:TABLE), save the tool data such as length and radius, but also further tool-specific information that the TNC needs to perform its functions.

To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL.T, proceed as follows:

UDisplay the tool table

UEdit the tool table: Set the EDITING soft key to ON

UWith the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the tool number that you want to edit

UWith the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the tool data that you want to edit

UTo leave the tool table, press the END key

Further information on this topic

Operating modes of the TNC: See «Operating Modes» on page 62

Working with the tool table: See «Entering tool data in the table» on page 150

50

First Steps with the TNC 640

This part of our website brings various platforms and archives together in one place where machine users can easily find documentation for milling controls and lathe controls, and for digital readouts of the series VRZ, ND, POSITIP 880, and IK 5000 QUADRA-CHEK.

    Home

    Service & Support

    Downloads

    Documentation

User documentation for controls, digital readouts, and evaluation units

TNCguide

Information about the following TNC controls: TNC 124, TNC 128, TNC 310, TNC 320, TNC 406/TNC 416, TNC 410, TNC 426/TNC 430, iTNC 530, TNC 620, TNC 640 and TNC7.

Use the TNCguide

MANUALplus 620 and CNC PILOT 640

This is where you’ll find the user’s manuals for the MANUALplus 620 and CNC PILOT 640.

See the manuals

ND and POSITIP 880

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the ND and POSITIP 880 series of devices from HEIDENHAIN.

See the instructions

IK 5000 QUADRA-CHEK

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the IK 5000 QUADRA-CHEK package of PC solutions.

See the instructions

VRZ counters

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the VRZ 100 to VRZ 900 series of devices from HEIDENHAIN.

Explore the archive

PreviousNext

TNCguide

Information about the following TNC controls: TNC 124, TNC 128, TNC 310, TNC 320, TNC 406/TNC 416, TNC 410, TNC 426/TNC 430, iTNC 530, TNC 620, TNC 640 and TNC7.

Use the TNCguide

MANUALplus 620 and CNC PILOT 640

This is where you’ll find the user’s manuals for the MANUALplus 620 and CNC PILOT 640.

See the manuals

ND and POSITIP 880

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the ND and POSITIP 880 series of devices from HEIDENHAIN.

See the instructions

IK 5000 QUADRA-CHEK

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the IK 5000 QUADRA-CHEK package of PC solutions.

See the instructions

VRZ counters

The Operating Manuals Archive (O.M.A.) provides instructions for the VRZ 100 to VRZ 900 series of devices from HEIDENHAIN.

Explore the archive

PreviousNext

Infobase: search for specific product

Search for specific product

Internet Explorer cannot fully display all content. For full use of this website, please use a different browser.

background image

TNC 640

User’s Manual
HEIDENHAIN
Conversational Programming

NC Software
340590-05
340591-05
340595-05

English (en)
1/2015

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Руководства по эксплуатации трамваев
  • Руководство какой деятельностью осуществляет президент рф
  • Ski doo skandic 600 мануал
  • Присадка абро премиум для двигателя инструкция
  • Атлант аква протект стиральная машина инструкция